YFP 378: 10 Questions for Early Retirement


Tim Baker, CFP® tackles 10 questions for those considering early retirement from sources of income, handling market volatility, health insurance options and more.

Episode Summary

This week, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, RICP® and Tim Ulbrich, PharmD tackle 10 questions for those considering early retirement. They discuss sources of income in retirement, handling market volatility when no longer working, health insurance coverage options, timing to draw on Social Security, and much more.

About Today’s Guest

Tim Baker is the Co-Founder and Director of Financial Planning at Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 12,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. 

Tim attended the United States Military Academy majoring in International Relations and branching Armor. After his military career, he worked as a logistician with a major retailer and a construction company. After much deliberation, Tim decided to make a pivot in his career and joined a small independent financial planning firm in 2012. In 2016, he launched his own financial planning firm Script Financial and in 2019 merged with Your Financial Pharmacist. Tim now lives in Columbus, Ohio with his wife (Shay), three kids (Olivia, Liam and Zoe), and dog (Benji).

Key Points from the Episode

  • Early Retirement Goals and Challenges [0:00]
  • Defining Early Retirement [6:02]
  • Questions to Consider for Early Retirement [8:42]
  • Replacing Pharmacist Paychecks [17:41]
  • Health Insurance Coverage [24:17]
  • Dependents and Social Security Timing [31:08]
  • Inflation and Tax Planning [34:57]
  • Partner and Spouse Alignment [37:20]
  • Long-Term Care Planning [39:56]
  • Conclusion and Resources [44:58]

Episode Highlights

“I think there’s this misconception, or this illusion of control that we have over our retirement age. I think around 40% of people retire earlier than expected. It’s usually due to a medical issue with themselves or a family member, or could be something like a layoff. There is this illusion of control. Now, there are things that you can do to help with that. But a lot of the time we don’t have that.” – Tim Baker [4:59]

“Define retirement. I think for a variety of reasons this question is important, because for a lot of people, we think that retirement is the destination, but it’s really just the next chapter in the journey, right?” -Tim Baker [10:32]

“I think it is really important when we talk about this question: are we accounting for inflation? I think the best way to do that in a retirement setting is, as much of your dollars can come from Social Security as possible is great. But then also taking intelligent risk in the market, where the market is kind of performing in a way that kind of keeps pace or outpaces inflation is what we want.” – Tim Baker [36:25]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich  00:00

Hey everybody. Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, Tim Baker and I are tackling 10 questions regarding early retirement. We discuss sources of income in retirement, handling market volatility when no longer working, health insurance coverage options, timing to draw on Social Security and much more. And to supplement this week’s episode, we have a free resource for you to download: Retirement Roadblocks: Identifying and Managing 10 Common Risks. Because here’s the reality, when planning for retirement or early retirement, as we’ll discuss on today’s show, so so much attention is given to the accumulation phase, growing your assets. But what doesn’t get a lot of press is how to turn those assets into a retirement paycheck. And when building a plan to deploy your assets during retirement, it’s important to consider various risks to either mitigate or avoid altogether, and that’s what this free resource and guide is all about. It’s available for you to download at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retirement risks. Again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retirementrisks.

Tim Ulbrich  01:11

 Now, before we get started with the show, I want to let you know about our next YFP webinar coming up on October 7, at 9pm Eastern: Aliquot Investing: Small investments in Big Real Estate Investing. This free webinar led by YFP Real Estate Investing podcast co-hosts Nate Hedrick and David Bright explores how syndications fit into a well rounded real estate investment strategy, especially for busy pharmacists who don’t have time to source, vet and manage real estate investments. In this webinar, David and Nate will be joined by Alex Cartwright, PhD, and economist who has also led syndication projects, including one in which both David and Nate have invested themselves. You learn more about this webinar and register at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/syndication. Again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/syndication. 

Tim Ulbrich  01:59

All right, let’s get started with today’s show. Tim Baker, welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker  02:06

Yeah, good to be back. How’s it going, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich  02:07

It is going well. I’m excited. This week we’re talking about early retirement, which is something that I keep hearing more and more pharmacists expressing as a goal. And so Tim, I’m curious to hear from you before we get into the details of our discussion, is that something you’re hearing a lot of as you talk with pharmacists that are engaging with us to learn more about our services? Is early retirement coming up as a frequent goal? And what do you suppose might be driving some of that?

Tim Baker  02:37

Yeah, I think, I think for a lot of people, there’s a there’s this notion of, like, I’ll never be able to retire, you know, and a lot of it’s because of the student debt burden. I do hear on, you know, refrain of, I want to get to a point where I work because I want to, not because I need to. I only, I hear that almost verbatim a couple times a month from a prospective client. So the the notion of early retirement, I don’t, I don’t want to say it’s kind of in the forefront. Obviously, we do, you know, work with a lot of people that are interested in kind of the FIRE movement and what that looks like. But I think that there’s this shroud, maybe, of student debt, that it’s like, how do I even overcome this? And, you know, in a way that puts me in a place to retire, let alone retire early. So I think those that don’t have that, or have kind of navigated a plan for the loans. I think there’s a little bit more of like, sunny skies, but I wouldn’t say there’s a lot of people that are saying, like, I need to retire by, you know, this age. I think that that’s kind of few and far between. 

Tim Ulbrich  03:50

And for those that aren’t familiar with the FIRE term, we’ve talked about it on the show before, financial independence, retire early. Lots of resources out there that folks can learn more more about that. But I’m glad you mentioned, Tim the work because I want to not have to. That’s something I hear a lot as well. And, you know, I think for some people, they love the work that they do, and it brings them a ton of value. It brings them a sense of purpose and meaning. Perhaps others, you know, maybe early retirement is, hey, I want to get out of the stressful environment that I’m working in, and I don’t necessarily love the work that I do, but regardless of those desires, that work because I want to not have to is a thread that I think often comes out and within that I typically will hear, hey, I want to have flexibility. I want to have options. So, you know, maybe I get to a point that, hey, I’d like to work part time, or maybe something happens, you know, health wise, or with a family member, or something unexpected, or pursuing a passion project or hobby, whatever would be, the reason that their financial plan is in a position that, whether it’s something they can see or not see at this moment, that they have options if they need those options in the future.

Tim Baker  04:59

Yeah, I think there’s this, this misconception, or, like, this illusion of control that we have over our retirement age, which is, and I think it’s something like 40% I don’t have that stat in front of me, but I think it’s like 40% of people retire earlier than expected. It’s usually due to a medical issue with themselves or a family member, or could be something like a layoff, that type of thing. So there is this illusion of, like, I have control now, there are things that you can do to help with that, and to, you know, to build, you know, whether there’s something like really to consult in that you have that flexibility, or things like that that gives you a little bit more control. But a lot of the time we don’t have that. And that’s kind of an illusion that we think we have.

Tim Ulbrich  05:44

Since we’re going to use the term early retirement throughout the episode that that implies that there’s an accepted norm, maybe, of what retirement means. So when you hear early retirement, that term and throughout the discussion today, what? What are we referring to? What assumptions are we making? What defines early retirement?

Tim Baker  06:01

Yeah, to your point, Tim, I don’t know if there is an accepted, like, when we say early retirement, this is the age that we’re talking about. Yeah, if you look at it from like, Social Security, early retirement, as defined by Social Security as 62. So there’s really, there’s really a couple ages related to Social Security. It’s your early retirements at 62, your full retirement age, which is different for a lot of people. Most people, it’s going to be 67 and then you have delayed retirement a that’s typically 70. So early retirement in the Social Security system is 62 and you can’t collect the benefit before that. The age that I think of like if you were to say, hey, I want to retire early. The age that I think of is 59 and a half years old. So why do I think of 59 and a half years old? The reason for that is all those retirement accounts, a 401K, an IRA or Roth IRA, they they’ll have basically guidelines to say if you take money out before 59 and a half years old, you’ll be, you know, penalized. Unless there’s, there’s exceptions to that, but you’ll be penalized by 10%. So that’s typically the the age that I’ll use. So like, if you were to say, Hey Tim, I want, you know, I want to retire early, and I would say, Well, what is that? If you say 55 then between 55 and 59 and a half years old, we have to figure out an income stream that’s probably not going to come out of your 401K or, you know your other retirement accounts. So that’s what I typically will use in my brain. I think you know, if you talk to people in the fire community and you say 50-59 and a half? That’s probably not early retirement for them. So those are kind of the few, the few dates, or the few ages that jump out to me when we have this discussion. But I think for all intents and purposes, it’s 59 and a half for me. 

Tim Ulbrich  07:55

I think the same thing. And I agree. I think some of the FIRE enthusiasts, although there’s many different flavors of FIRE, right? But the FIRE enthusiasts, a lot of people might think a early retirement, you know, late 30s, early 40s, right? Type of ages that you typically see. But I think 59 and a half, for the reason you mentioned is, is what often comes up. The other one 62. You mentioned social security. When could I draw Social Security? 65 Medicare, that often comes up. You know, we’ll talk about health insurance. So the point being is, as we say all the time on the show, we’ve got to have intentionality on like, what’s the goal? What’s the purpose? Why is this a goal? If it’s a goal for you, and then we can start to plan around that, like, what does that mean to you? You know, is it 59? Is it 54 and for what reason? And then what does that mean in terms of various savings accounts? So let’s jump in. We’re going to talk about 10 questions that we think are important questions to consider for folks that are thinking about early retirement. And that could be someone listening and says, Hey, I know I want to early retire and I’ve set that date. Or it could be folks that are just thinking about this as something that they’re they’re curious about and want to learn more. As we go through these 10 questions, the intent is not that we’re going to cover each one of these areas in a significant amount of depth. We’ll reference other resources that we have on each one of these topics as we go throughout but really to introduce the question and get you thinking about these different areas as it relates to early retirement. So Tim, the first question that I think is important for folks to consider is, Will I work at all during retirement? Right? And as obvious as that sounds, I think if, if people are thinking of very traditional retirement, it’s, hey, we work for 30, 40, years, and then we don’t work at all. But for others, it may be that we work part time. And pharmacists, I think, are in a unique position where they have more of the opportunity to work part time, work as a contractor, versus other professions out there. So why is this question, will I work at all during retirement so important?

Tim Baker  09:52

And I think, like, if we’re defining early retirement, I think you can even define like retirement. I think so many people, in a traditional sense, they. Think of retirement as, you know, you punch the clock the last time, and then the next day, you’re sitting on a beach or you’re up somewhere, and that’s it, right? And, you know, a lot of people, especially in the fire movement, when they talk about, you know, financially independent, retire early, I think the retire, I think that’s what rubs people the wrong way, is because they overlay that traditional picture of retirement into that paradigm. And a lot of people are saying like, Well, we are still working, we’re just working our on our own terms, right? So I think for, I think for a variety of reasons, like this question is important, because I think for a lot of people, we think that retirement is the destination, but it’s really just the next chapter in the journey, right? And so much of our, for a lot of people, so much of our identity is wrapped up into our role as a pharmacist or whatever we’re doing, and once that like is gone, that can be jarring for a lot of people. So it’s not just a monetary thing. So to me, I think this is where some life planning really gets in, gets you know, it would be really important is, you know, okay, if we don’t have to work, we truly don’t have to work. What are we doing? You know, are we volunteering? Are we taking care of grandkids? Are we getting into hobbies? Are we traveling? You know, there’s a lot of stats that say, if you work, the longer that you work, the more you know, the better your retirement will be. In terms of, like, the financial planning part of it, because you’re just delaying a lot of the things that work, you know, for you, whether that’s health insurance or whether that’s income, things like that. But it’s also like, you know, your social circles are often connected to your work in a lot of ways, like if that goes away. So to me, this is really important to kind of, I think, look at it both from a dollars and cents perspective, Tim, but also like the social aspect of who are you post, you know, full time pharmacist, you know, and looking in the mirror and doing some deep digging of, like, what does what does this actually look like? So I think it’s an important question to ask. 

Tim Ulbrich  12:14

I agree, and I’m glad you mentioned, you know, what does this look like? But how I be spending my time? It’s actually not one of the other questions we had. So we’ll kind of knock both of those out, knock both of those out together. But this is one of those things that we, myself included, we have this idea of what retirement might look like. That could be how our parents have gone through that phase, or grandparents, maybe what we see on commercials, whatever. But taking it to the next step of, what does a day look like? I’ve heard people go through this exercise. You mentioned the life plan, which I thought was great, and having some clarity there, but going through the exercise of actually, like mapping out for a month, like, what would I be doing on a Monday at 11 o’clock, right? On a Tuesday at four o’clock? And you know, not that you have to get that granular per se, but the idea is a good one, that right now you think about the percentage of your schedule that is occupied by work, and especially, I think about folks, Tim, in our phase of life where it’s work, and young kids like, that’s a big chunk of our time, right? And if you fast forward to a date and time where we’re not working, and the kids out of the house, Whoa, that is a big gap of time. So what are we doing with that time? What are the goals you mentioned? You know, is it travel? Is it volunteering? Is it spending time with with the grandkids? Like, what does that rich life look like in retirement? And the second layer I would add to that, Tim, is, if there’s a partner, spouse, significant other involved, like, what does that look like for the individual and then for the we. You know, Jess and I were joking recently that, like we love spending time together, but we also have individual things that we love to do. And I very much see in retirement that we’ll have things that we want to do together, whether that be volunteering or traveling or other things, and then we’ll have other things where it’s like, she’s doing her thing, I’m doing my thing. So, yeah, I think that discussion of, what does this look like for I and what does this look like for we as well?

Tim Baker  14:06

Well, especially in retirement, as you age, like, one of the things that you know, often doesn’t get talked about, and it’s a risk in retirement is loss of spouse, and a lot of it’s it comes from the perspective of, like, loss of a social security check and things like that. But what about like, you know, I look at my parents, love my parents, but my dad doesn’t have his own interest, like, he just kind of does what my mom wants to do. So like, if he were to lose my mom, like, like, what happens, you know? And so I think, like, that’s, that’s a big thing. And, yeah, in the, in the life planning, we go through an exercise called ideal schedule. So you go through and you say, Okay, what’s the ideal day, from the moment you wake up, from the moment that you, you know, put your head on the pillow, then what’s the ideal week? So Monday through Sunday, like, what are we doing? And then it goes out to the ideal year. Like, are you spending, you know, the summertime up North, or are you, you know, are you visiting family, those types of things? And I think that for a lot of people, you know, they realize how much of their day is tied into work, and then once, once that’s gone, like, what happens? So, yeah, those are the exercises. I mean, we’ve talked about, like, the three questions, and I think those are all, you know, important things to kind of reference back to and revisit, especially as you’re going through the next, like, phase of your life. But I think really put pen to paper and I’ve talked about this, I think with you. I don’t know if I’ve ever talked about on the podcast, but like, when I did my sabbatical, I had a month off where I did not touch work, and I kind of had a little bit of like, what am I doing? Like, like, how am I gonna, like, fill the day, which sounds crazy, but like it was a struggle for me, and like I wanted to make the best use of the time, but I also felt like I had some constraints here and there, but like that, that little window was, like, important for me to kind of put myself in someone’s shoes who’s kind of going through that transition. And it sounds silly, but it’s it’s not.

Tim Ulbrich  14:34

That’s a good point, though. I’ve actually heard people talk about, I’m thinking back to the interview that I did on episode 291 with Dave Zgarrick, who is has made that transition in retirement. And he talked about redefining retirement, really thinking about as like a half time to kind of reassess where are we going. Why are we going here? What does this look like? But I think some of those break periods, you know, you mentioned the sabbatical, other people talk about mini retirements. I think it’d be really helpful to having some of these experiences where we get a feel for what this might look like. And you know what? What are some of the ahas of how I do want to spend my time, or what the gaps are in time? I mean, joking aside, we’re just in a phase of life, both of us right now, we’re really sun up to sundown. You know, it’s work, kids, that’s the schedule. 

Tim Baker  16:08

I made the comment like, hey, we haven’t, like, Shay and our kids haven’t really hung out with you and Jess and your boys in a while. And I think I would just look at our schedule and it’s like, soccer, football, swim, soccer, football, swim. Like, it’s just, it’s just so many things that are going on, but eventually that’s going to go away, right to your point, like, that’s, that’s going to be in our rearview mirror. And that’s why, I think, like, even, even couples, sometimes, because they’re so in their, you know, in their kids, you know, activities in their lives that they almost forget about each other. You know, spouses and that can be, you know, I think there is a pretty high level of, you know, divorce and things like that as you, as you age, because you kind of lose that connection with your spouse. And I think that’s important to make sure that you’re continuing to kindle so all these things kind of play into it.

Tim Ulbrich  17:38

So that’s our first two questions, will I work at all during retirement? How I be spending my time? The third question, Tim is, how will I replace my pharmacist paycheck? Again, seems like an obvious question, but for decades, we have a an employer that’s paying us on a monthly basis. And if we were to stop work altogether, again, that may or may not happen, but if we’re to stop working, we’ve got to make our own paycheck at this point. So we’ve talked about this on the show show before. We’ll link to that in the show notes. But thoughts on this question of, how will I replace my pharmacist paycheck?

Tim Baker  18:10

Yeah, I don’t really think, I don’t really think a lot changes here. I think what, what is, what does change in terms of, like, the sources, I think what does change is kind of like, where in early retirement? Where do they come like, where does the money come from? So, you know, if we’re retiring at 55 the the sources of your income is probably going to be from part time employment. It could be from your traditional portfolio, but from, like, a brokerage account that doesn’t have the 59 and a half, you know, 10% penalty, which you have to build, right? So lot of people, they’re really set on, you know, they’re 401, K and their Roth IRA and things like that, which is really important. But the third bucket, so that we have the pre, pre tax after tax. The third bucket is the taxable, which is going to be in an early retirement bucket. So I would say probably those are the two big things for most people. Would be part time employment, and then, like a brokerage account, or like traditional savings. If you’re in the real estate, it could be rental income or liquidation of like a rental property. But then as you age, you know, the things that kind of get the green light are Social Security. You know, if you decide to collect that at 62 or you wait to 67 or even later to 70, and then getting into, once you’re past 59 and a half, you know, the traditional portfolio where you don’t get that 10% haircut, you know, you can start, you know, distributing from a 401K, IRA, etc. There are other things out there, like annuities. It could be, it could be a pension. You know, if you have a company or government pension, which we know aren’t necessarily, you know, a thing that a lot of people have, but that’s typically based on an age that you can, you know, get to that. It could be, you know, tapping into the value of your home, things like reverse mortgages, which get a nasty reputation, or selling a business, or could be cash value life insurance. But I would say the heavy hitters here, especially early on, it’s going to be part time employment. It’s going to be things like a brokerage account savings, and then, you know, potentially, you know, real estate, things like that. 

Tim Ulbrich  20:08

And as you mentioned, especially with the brokerage account, especially with real estate, there’s planning that has to be done there, right, for us to be able to accrue those savings, to tap into those in early retirement. So, you know, early planning, of course, really important here, and when we talk about priority of investing, this is always the one asterisk, right? Hey, if you’re if you’re thinking about early retirement, you know this sequence changes when we think about more the traditional buckets, like the 401K, 403B’s, IRAs, etc, because of that 59 and a half restraint that you mentioned earlier. Tim, number four on our list is, hey, what if there’s a market downturn early on in my early retirement? So I’ve decided to retire early. You know, let’s say there’s a market downturn and we experience some of that volatility, that that can be disruptive to the nest egg. Always a problem, but maybe more of a problem here if we’ve got a longer runway of years that we need those funds in retirement.

Tim Baker  21:06

Yeah. So what we’re talking about here is sequence risk, or sequence of returns risk, which, which is the potential negative impact that the order of your returns, your investment returns, on your portfolio due to the market, is heightened, especially in the withdrawal phase. So if you take and I’ll run through this, I know we don’t have a ton of time, but I wanted to kind of, I feel like we’ve talked about sequence risk, but I haven’t really talked through, like a scenario. So I actually did a scenario where we have one where it’s favorable returns, so like double digit returns, like the second that you retire. And then one that is like negative returns. So, and then what does the, what does the outcome look like at the end of I did it for like a 10 year period. So if you look at, if we start with a million dollars, and you have an annual withdrawal of 50,000, which is 5% and we have a, you know, we’re doing this over 10 years. If we go into the first year of favorable the favorable scenario, the first year, we get a 15% return, 12% return, 8% return, even taking out 50, you know, and over the 10 years, it’s like 4.7% in aggregate, a return. At the end of the 10 years, you’re gonna have $1.2 million. So early on we’ve got, you know, the first, you know, three years, you know, 30 some odd percent. If we look at the same thing, instead of getting positive 15, we get negative, you know, negative 15, negative 12. That same portfolio, even over the 10 years, which is going to get a 4.7% return, is going to end with 361,000. So it’s almost a million dollar swing. So it’s the same aggregate, you know, 10 year, you know, return. But after the first year, for the favorable, you end with 1.085 million. After the first year, you end with $800,000. So you’ve taken off 15% because that’s your that’s basically the market downturn, but you’ve also withdrawn $50,000. So that’s what we’re talking about here with sequence of return risk is that the timing of when you retire is probably one of the most important things related to the market. So what we’ve always said is like flexibility here. So if the market is tanking, it might be worth to, like, work another year, and most of the time, like, you know, in this scenario, we have, you know, four years minus 15, minus 12, minus eight, minus five. Typically, the market doesn’t do that. You know, we don’t have, you know, consecutive years, maybe two, maybe three of year. But like, this is where, you know, pushing that out and having flexibility of like, okay, maybe I’m not going to retire at, you know, 53 I’m going to retire at 56. I’m going to retire at 57. That type of thing. So that, to me, is really important, and that, and that speaks to the the timing of the investment returns that you’re getting. Now, the ways to combat this is, which is really hard, is, is really to kind of be more conservative, take your money from, you know, equities to bonds or even cash. But the problem with that is, you know, nobody has, like, a, you know, a crystal ball to say, like, when’s the best time to do that? So that’s, that’s kind of sequence, risk at play.

Tim Ulbrich  24:20

Number five on our list, Tim, I alluded to this a little bit earlier, is what will I do for health insurance coverage? We’re not yet at the age of 65 we can’t necessarily put Medicare into play. We no longer have employer coverage if, if we’re working part time or not working at all. You know what options are we thinking about here and and obviously we’ve got to factor this in as a cost as well.

Tim Baker  24:42

Yeah. So I mean, unfortunately, and we’ve kind of bemoaned this fact being business owners, there’s not a great option here. You know, I think you know, looking at employer sponsored COBRA coverage, but that only typically lasts 18 months, and that’s really expensive because you’re paying the full premium. If you have a spouse that you can ride his or her coattails, that’s one way to do it. It could be private health insurance. So looking, you know, at the exchanges, things like healthcare sharing ministries like that, that might be something. I know you looked at those in the past. It could be, you know, there are some, and I don’t know if Starbucks still does this, but I remember a lot of people. I think my sister worked for Starbucks, you know, when she was in college, just to get in, you know, insurance through them, she was working part time. It could be Medicaid if you don’t have assets, like, if, you know, I would say that you probably shouldn’t be retiring if that’s the case. Or just, like, short term plans that provide, like, temporary coverage. So probably, for most people, it’s going to be looking at the exchanges and trying to trying to find the best, you know, probably catastrophic plan that they can. But unfortunately, there isn’t really a great, you know, a great solution here to kind of bridge you before you get to 65 to get to Medicare, you know, yeah, it’s, it’s kind of, you know, pick your poison, so to speak.

Tim Ulbrich  26:00

You know that you mentioned the Starbucks, there’s actually a FIRE pathway, barista fire that’s named after that, that play, right? Which is, you know, working part time at a place like Starbucks or a place that has those benefits to be able to get access to those. You know, the other other comment I’d make here, Tim is, I think while these costs are very real, like, we have to put them as objectively in play as possible. What I mean by that is, like, if you’ve done a good job and the dollars are there, like, even if this feels scary or you don’t want to spend money on it, like, if the math supports it, like you just factored into the plan, right? I’ve seen some people, I think, talk about this as like, Oh, I’ve had employer coverage my whole life. I’m three years away from Medicare. I’m done working. I’m over it. Don’t need it, you know. Don’t want to be working anymore, but I’m gonna wait till I get to 65. And maybe that’s the play. But if the nest egg is there, like, we just need to factor this in as an expense and consider it. I mean, the other note and comment I’d make here, back to our discussion of early planning with something like a brokerage account. This would be another play of early planning with something like HSA contributions, where, you know, can we be accruing and saving money in HSA throughout our career, such that one of these instances here, we’re talking about early retirement. We’ve got some dollars that are earmarked specifically for that, that we don’t have to have to necessarily draw separately from our portfolio.

Tim Baker  27:21

That’s right, yeah. HSA would be a great bucket for this, because it has the triple tax benefit, but the flexibility to be able to use for you know, now and later. So yeah, that’s a great bucket for that.

Tim Ulbrich  27:34

Number six is, are my dependents independent? And if not, have I factored that into my planning and assumptions? Tim lots to think about here, kids and elderly parents, but looking at dependence and cost of dependence.

Tim Baker  27:48

Yeah, this is, um, this is, this is kind of hard too, because, you know, I always joke with my with my kids, that, you know, they they need to move out so I can, you know, turn their room into a a whiskey room. And, you know, my kids are 10 and five or whatever. Obviously, Zoe’s always younger, but I think this is hard, because I think we are all trying to prepare our kids to kind of launch, right? But, you know, oftentimes they come back. And you know, we have to kind of figure out what that looks like. So that could be, you know, it could be for kids managing, like, their college and expenses related to that. But then after, like, if they don’t get a job, or if they’re not, you know, able to support themselves. Like, what are the, what are the rules around rent and things like that, and just, how does that affect your overall financial plan? And then elderly parents, there’s a lot of, you know, pharmacists that we work with that they say, I am my parent’s retirement plan. Like, that’s the thing, right? And, and I respect that, you know, a lot of it’s like, Hey, I’m a first generation immigrant. You know, they’re you know, they’re sacrificed to get over here. And my sacrifice is kind of making sure that they’re okay, you know, in retirement. So, you know, we have this term called the sandwich generation. It typically is, you know, people in their 40s and 50s that are taking care of, like adult children, but they’re also taking care of, like elderly parents. That’s a big thing. And again, like, I would say, it kind of goes back to when we talk about, like, education planning, like you have to put your mask on first and then put on the mask of your child. I don’t think that ever goes away. So I think that, you know, this can be an unexpected thing for a lot of parents, but you know it can, really, especially like elderly plant parents, if you’re the one that’s kind of, you know, caring for them, and these are often the things that kind of force can force a retirement early for you is that you’re taking care of other people, right? So I think having these conversations with, you know, your kids, with your elderly parents and and come up with a plan and kind of ground rules. I think is really important. So we can kind of include this in the plan and know, you know, when does zig and zag?

Tim Ulbrich  30:06

Yeah, Tim, anytime we talk about this topic, always comes to mind conversation we had with Cameron Huddleston on the show a couple times, who wrote the book, Mom and Dad, We Need to Talk. And, you know, in the context of elderly parents, this is where those conversations are so important, as uncomfortable as they may be, right? Because, you know, I’m thinking about even discussions I’ve had with my parents about, you know, what does their financial position look like? What are their retirement goals? What are their desires for, you know, staying in the home versus other living arrangements. What is their long term care insurance policy look like? And, you know, part of those conversations, obviously, is focused in a genuine care and desire of what, what do my parents want? But there’s also a reality of like that may impact our financial plan, and that’s not being selfish, like we’re just trying to be responsible. And I think you know, if we can get into those open conversations, we can start to plan around that a little bit, to understand what the impact may or may not be of that situation with parents on our financial plan. 

Tim Baker  31:05

That’s right.

Tim Ulbrich  31:06

Number seven, we touch on this a little bit. Tim, but when will I draw on Social Security? We talked before in episode 294 about common Social Security mistakes to avoid, and a big part of that discussion was around when we opt into starting Social Security benefits. For someone who’s saying about early retirement, you know, and building that retirement paycheck, a Social Security benefit might, might be an important part of that, and the temptation, perhaps could be there to start those benefits early and just understanding what the impact of that could be versus a delayed benefit selection. So thoughts here on this question of, when will I draw? 

Tim Baker  31:41

I think a lot of financial planners are, you know, coming around to the fact that, like, if you can delay your Social Security benefit as long as possible, the better knows for the the overall plan. And I know this, to your point, it can be if you’re, if you’re working for or if you’re, if you’re retired for, you know, 10 years or whatever it is, and your funds are dwindling in some of those, you know, brokerage accounts or savings. I think it can be tempting to to draw earlier, right? But I think if you look at the math, and I have, you know, I think I pulled, I think this is from my Social Security statement. If you look at my Social Security statement. If I were to retire at 62 my monthly benefit would be $1,826. if I were to retire at not full Social Security age, but 65 it would be $2290. If I then go to 67 which is my full retirement age, it goes to $2662. If I delay it till age 70 so I’m getting those deferment credits, it goes to $3,306. So the spectrum of early at 62 is $1826, to delayed is $3307.  But the big thing here, Tim, that doesn’t get enough press, is that it’s inflation protected, which there’s no other pension or annuity out there that you can get that does that. So one of the big hang ups for for retirees is like, I’m working on a fixed income. I’m working on a fixed income. But once you know inflation takes over, as we’ve seen in recent years, that really, like, you know, provides pressure on, okay, how am I going to let you know, how I’m going to make this, you know, these dollars last. So that would be the thing that I would implore, you know, people, when they’re looking at their, you know, their, their benefit for Social Security is, you know, if we’re planning this, can we plan to at least get the full retirement age, or, you know, can we delay it from 62 to 67 at least, to get from, you know, an $1,800 benefit to a almost $2,700 benefit because this will pay you out for the rest of your life, which we don’t know what that is, inflation protected. And that’s where you see that exponential benefit versus, you know, if you, if you, if you peg it at $1,800. So it’s still inflation protected, but I think you want that, that percent of your paycheck to be as high as possible that is covered by, you know, the Social Security and Inflation. So it’s really, it’s a really important discussion to have. 

Tim Ulbrich  34:21

Tim, it’s a good plug and a reminder for folks, if they’re not already doing this, to check out their My Social Security account ssa.gov just to dig into that report, what are the expected benefits? Always a good thing to build into. I typically try to check it in just once a year, kind of see what’s going on. So since you mentioned inflation, Tim, let’s jump down to that one, and that question being, have I accounted for inflation? You mentioned social security being inflation protected, but really nothing else beyond that. So, you know if we think of inflation as of late, which has been higher than historically, although that’s come down, you know, more recently, but even the historical rate of inflation, if we’re retiring, let’s say, in our early 50s and were afforded the opportunity to live into our 90s, like costs are going up right significantly over that time period. So the question here is, have I accounted for inflation when I’m looking at these early retirement numbers?

Tim Baker  35:13

Yeah, and one of the best ways to account for inflation as retire is to be in a you know, is, have some of your your assets in equities, right? Which gets scary, because then we talk about, you know, the sequence of return risk. But I think, really, for a portfolio to endure 30, 40, 50, 60, years is, is to make sure that you’re taking, you know, intelligent risk in the market. So you know, we just got news of the rate cut yesterday, and immediately, you know, you’re seeing like our cash account at our custodian went from 5.1% which is really solid, to 4.6%. So savers, and often, you know, people that have reached you know that are in retirement have a good amount of cash, or they should, because, you know they’re they’re basically taking slugs of cash out to basically build their paycheck. That’s going to affect them potentially negatively. Now, you know interest rates, you know in inflation, sometimes, you know we’ll see interest rates go go down, but we won’t see like the cost of goods go down because they’re pegged that we talked about that in previous episodes, they’re kind of pegged at that high watermark. So I think is really important, you know, when we talk about this question is, you know, are we accounting for inflation? I think the best way to do that in a retirement, you know, setting is, again, as much as your dollars can come from Social Security as possible is great. But then also taking, you know, intelligent risk in the market, where, you know, the market is kind of, you know, performing in a way that kind of, you know, keeps pace or outpaces inflation, you know, is what we want. So, you know, on the so that’s, that’s kind of on the asset side, but then on the debt side, you know, just making sure that, you know, we’re, we’re efficient, you know, there with with rates and where inflation is as well. So I think it’s important to, you know, for retirees that are potentially living on a fixed income to account for, and a lot of people this, and really, taxes. Tim, it’s kind of like, can be a second, you know, an afterthought.

Tim Ulbrich  37:20

Good point on the taxes, probably a whole separate episode, yeah, around like, tax planning and early retirement. Um, number nine on our list is, is my partner spouse significantly now they’re on the same page. We already talked about this in the context of, hey, what does that, you know, schedule look like? What does that ideal life, that rich life, look like in retirement? And, you know, what’s the I? What’s the we? But I think it’s also just a bigger question of, like, are we on the same page with this concept of early retirement, and maybe, if one spouse wants to work longer than another and one’s having to draw down from their assets, like, are we good with that? You know, does that jive? 

Tim Baker  37:55

And I think, I think this kind of starts with, you know, where are we at and where are we going? So you know, when we do this with clients, we we call the first meeting, Get Organized where, you know, we’ve plugged everything into our client portal, checking, savings, credit cards, student loans, investment accounts, value, the house, the mortgage, all the things, right? And for a lot of people, it’s the first time they’ve seen their stuff all in one spot, right? Because we bank over here, we have debt over here, we have investments over here, and then for spouses, that’s also true, right? Because I don’t necessarily see everything that Shay has, you know, if I’m not tuned in. So if we plug that all into one platform, we can kind of see the landscape of where we’re at, and then I think from there, once we establish where we’re at, we talk about where we where we’re going. And then I think this is some of these questions that come up is like, okay, Shay, if I retire and you’re still working for 10 years, like, Are you cool with that? Probably not, right. So I think those that’s the space to have the conversation again. I’m biased, Tim, right? Because, you know, we’re planners, but sometimes these are hard to have with your spouse. So having that third party, like the independent third party that has your best interest, that can ask questions, is, I think, a safe place so to speak, to have these conversations. Because, you know, if Shay says I’m going to retire early and you can keep working. I’m going to say, Yeah, that’s cool, whatever. But maybe I have some resentment about that, you know, and I think if you’re in a in a place where, you know, it’s safe, and we can kind of talk these out and get on the same page, it’s really important because, you know, we’re trying to row this boat in the same direction. And if, you know, if we’re just, you know, having these service conversations and not really getting, you know, into depth, then we’re just kind of spinning in a circle. So I think it’s really important to to make sure you know, and this goes back to life planning, to make sure that you know your vision of early retirement, you know, overlaps. It doesn’t have to be the same, yeah, but it overlaps with your spouse or with your partner to make sure that you know your needs are taken care of, but also your spouse’s needs are taken care of. 

Tim Ulbrich  40:08

What came to mind, Tim, as you’re talking about, is my I think my parents, to their credit, have done a really good job of this. My mom’s been retired now for a few years, and my dad has no plans in the near future retire. He just loves his work. It’s energizing, and he acknowledges maybe that will change at some point in the future when it does, and maybe it looks part time or consulting or whatever, but they have kind of figured out like for them individually. My mom, you know, has a ton of joy that she gets from just the daily rhythms and routines that she has, and it doesn’t mean my dad has to be doing the same thing. So I don’t think there’s a right or wrong here. It’s more about what works for you as a couple. And as you mentioned, having some of those conversations to avoid, or try to avoid, as much as you can, some of the resentment or other feelings that might come up along the way. All right, our last question, number 10 on this list of 10 questions to consider for early retirement is, am I prepared for potential long term care expenses? Tim, we talked about Medicare already briefly, but here we’re talking about some of the significant expenses that can come beyond what Medicare may cover, and specifically here thinking about long term care insurance, we talked about this on episode 296, we’ll link to that in the show notes. Your thoughts here on, am I prepared for potential long term care expenses?

Tim Baker  41:25

Yeah. So I think the stat is, is that you know, a person that’s age 65 is going to spend $157,500 on health care and medical expenses, you know, throughout the course of their life, a couple of $315,000. So you know, and this doesn’t necessarily include the cost of, like, long term care. So when we talk about long term care, this is really, you know, help with kind of the the daily living thing. So like being able to get out of bed, you know, move around your house, use the bathroom, dress, feed yourself, but also kind of more like, you know, cognitive things like being able to pay bills, or, you know, shop so, you know, oftentimes, and actually one of the biggest, the biggest cause for, like, you know, a long term care policy to get triggered, is Alzheimer’s. But the second one is, the second biggest is arthritis, Tim, believe it or not. So, you know, a lot this is one of those things. It’s like, Ah, this will never happen to me, or I don’t got to worry about that, or I’ll figure this out later. But you know, it’s, it’s one of those biases that we have that, you know, it often can come and bite us in the rear end. So what we talk about with long term care is, there’s, there’s really two ways to prepare for this. One is to self insure. So just like we’re talking about being able to, like, pay our own health care and things like that, this is kind of, this is not that. This is where we’re basically saying we’re going to forego a policy. We’re basically going to, you know, if this comes up, we’re going to reach into our own pocket, reach into our own portfolio, and pay for the care that we need. The alternative, and what I would recommend, is purchasing a long term care insurance policy where it really affords you access to benefits that allow you, at a minimum, to age in place. So these, you know, there’s studies that show that, you know, couples are willing to spend, you know, $2500 to $3,000 a year on a long term care policy. And you can get a policy that you know can kind of get you a basic, a basic policy that will have, you know, someone come in the home, or things like that. I think a lot of people, when they think of long term care, they think of like, of like a nursing home and things like that. This is really trying to, you know, get, get a policy that provides benefits that can bring people into your home to assist you as you age. So, you know, there’s typically a Goldilocks zone. Is that you should start, you know? So we talk about early retirement, you should start discussing this, probably in your 40s and 50s, start really assessing it in your 50s. And the kind of, the sweet spot the purchase of policy is, like, early 60s, yeah. So this is really important, because, again, like the once you once you kind of go into, like, a facility, if that, if that’s the case, like, that’s where expenses can get really astronomical. So the longer that you can stay in place and have the help that you need, the better, I think it is for you from a psychological perspective, but also from a financial perspective. And again, this is one of the ones. It’s like, like, not going to happen to me, Tim. I think important to look at. And I think we look at these policies as almost as like a a coupon for future care. So, like, hey, you know, if I get a benefit, that’s $3,000 a month, but you know what I need is $4000 then I’m only reaching in my pocket $1000 bucks to kind of cover down on the difference.

Tim Ulbrich  44:54

Again, episode 296, five key decisions for long term care insurance recovered that topic in depth. We’ll link to that in the show notes. Tim, great stuff. And one thing I would say to our listeners, early retirement or not, we touch on a lot of areas of the financial plan. We talked about the importance of having a life plan, having the vision for where we’re going, why we’re going there. We talked about building a retirement paycheck. We touched on insurance, Social Security, investing priorities and decisions to make around investing and how to prioritize different parts of the investing plan. And at YFP, this is what our team of certified financial planners and tax professionals do. We support pharmacists at every stage of their careers to take control their finances, reach their financial goals and build wealth through comprehensive – looking at all the different areas we discussed – fee only, financial planning and tax planning. And we’d love to have an opportunity to talk with you, to learn more about your situation, to learn more about our services. Determine if there’s a good fit. You can book a free discovery call with Tim by visiting yourfinancialpharmacist.com top of the page there, you’ll see an option to book a discovery call. Thanks so much everyone for listening. We’ll catch you again next week.

Tim Ulbrich  46:01

As we conclude this week’s podcast an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts, is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyzes expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer, thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 370: Your Retirement Questions Answered with Tim Baker, CFP


Tim Baker, CFP and YFP Director of Planning answers questions from the YFP community on saving and preparing for retirement. This episode is brought to you by First Horizon.

Episode Summary

Planning and preparing for retirement can feel overwhelming. In this episode, Tim Baker, CFP®, RICP®, RLP®, makes the steps to planning for retirement more manageable. He answers three questions from the YFP community on retirement planning, including:

  • How to determine the optimal amount to save for retirement
  • Strategies for dealing with market downturns during retirement
  • How different investment options impact retirement savings

This episode is brought to you by First Horizon.

About Today’s Guest

Tim Baker is the Co-Founder and Director of Financial Planning at Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 12,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. 

Tim attended the United States Military Academy majoring in International Relations and branching Armor. After his military career, he worked as a logistician with a major retailer and a construction company. After much deliberation, Tim decided to make a pivot in his career and joined a small independent financial planning firm in 2012. In 2016, he launched his own financial planning firm Script Financial and in 2019 merged with Your Financial Pharmacist. Tim now lives in Columbus, Ohio with his wife (Shay), three kids (Olivia, Liam and Zoe), and dog (Benji).

Key Points from the Episode

  • Retirement planning, investment options, and home loans for pharmacists. [0:00]
  • Retirement planning, including determining optimal savings amount and factors to consider. [2:24]
  • Retirement planning, nest egg calculation, and potential deficits. [5:51]
  • Retirement planning, including nest egg calculation and goal setting. [12:46]
  • Strategies for dealing with market downturns during retirement. [19:33]
  • Managing investment risk through asset allocation and flexibility. [24:25]
  • Retirement planning, investment options, and their impact on savings. [28:42]
  • Traditional portfolio allocation and retirement savings with emphasis on asset allocation and tax considerations. [32:49]
  • Retirement planning for pharmacists, including asset allocation and tax strategies. [37:30]

Episode Highlights

“I think the big thing is how do you define optimal [savings for retirement]? And then the factors are so important. What type of lifestyle do you want? I think what most people want is to live a similar lifestyle to what they’re living as they’re working. So they don’t necessarily want to be more lavish. But they don’t necessarily want to give up things either.” – Tim Baker [4:27]

“The nest egg calculation, to me, that’s the best way to make that big number, the kind of unknown, a little bit more digestible.” – Tim Baker [9:37]

“I think a lot of people think that they have control over when they’ll retire and they don’t. There’s a stat that says 40% of people don’t work to their expected retirement age, either because of health issues, or they were eliminated from a job, etc.” -Tim Baker [11:12]

“I think the best time to plan for retirement is now and the sooner you can kind of look at where you’re at and be able to adjust where you need to go, the better.” – Tim Baker [11:44]

“When you talk about the nest egg calculation, that is where the value really lies. The short answer of how do you determine the amount of savings needed for retirement? Nest egg calculation, three words.” – Tim Ulbrich [13:39]

“So, you know, and again, the most successful retirees are the ones that are most flexible.” – Tim Baker [25:45]

“It’s being in the right asset allocation. It’s keeping your expenses low. And being consistent with that structure. I think we’ll get people through any of the seasons that you’ll see over the course of an investing career.” – Tim Baker [28:28]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich  00:00

Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week we take questions from the YFP community on retirement planning, we discuss how to determine the optimal amount to save for retirement strategies for dealing with market downturns during retirement, and how different investment options such as stocks, bonds, and real estate can impact your retirement savings. Let’s hear from today’s sponsor First Horizon and then we’ll jump into the show.

Tim Ulbrich  00:31

Does saving 20% for a down payment on a home feel like an uphill battle? It’s no secret that pharmacists have a lot of competing financial priorities, including high student loan debt, meaning that saving 20% for a down payment on a home may take years. For several years now we’ve been partnering with First Horizon who offers a professional home loan option AKA a doctor or pharmacist loan that requires a 3% downpayment for single family home or townhome for first time homebuyers, has no PMI, and offers a 30 year fixed rate mortgage on home loans up to $766,550 in most areas. The pharmacist home loan is available in all states except Alaska and Hawaii, and can be used to purchase condos as well, however, rates may be higher and a condo review has to be completed. While I’ve personally worked with First Horizon before and had a great experience with Tony and his team, don’t just take it from me. Here’s what Payton from Tyler, Texas had to say about his experience with First Horizon: “Aaron, Cindy, and Marilyn were very easy to work with. As a first time homebuyer, I shopped around for lenders at the onset of the process, Aaron was always very quick to reply and provide me with any details I requested in order to move forward and my decision to select a lender. Once I selected First Horizon, Marilyn and Cindy did a great job of keeping my wife and I informed of the process. Closing was a breeze yesterday at the title office. And I sincerely appreciate the team going above and beyond to keep my interest rate locked despite extending closing due to negotiations with the seller. I’ve already shared my positive experience with many pharmacists on the groups. And I look forward my brother, also a pharmacist, refinancing with you guys when he decides to.” So to check out the requirements for First Horizon’s pharmacists home loan and to start the pre-approval process, visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. 

Tim Ulbrich  02:24

Tim Baker Good to have you back on the show.

Tim Baker  02:27

Good to be back. Tim, how’s it going?

Tim Ulbrich  02:29

It’s going well. I’m looking forward to this episode. We’re gonna be talking about retirement planning – a topic that we’re seeing a ton of interest in getting lots of questions about. You did a webinar recently around retirement planning. Lots of engagement that came from that. So we want to answer some of the most common questions we’re getting from the YFP community around retirement planning. And we’re gonna go through four different questions around how do we determine how much is enough? What are some of the strategies to deal with market downturns while you’re in retirement, I know something that you’ve talked about before of that important window before leading up to an after? And how we think about the investment strategies. We’ll talk about some of the different investment options that can impact retirement savings, and then we’ll wrap up by talking about some of the health care costs in retirement. So let’s start with the first question, Tim, which is how do you determine the optimal amount saving needed for retirement? And really, what are the factors that should be considered when setting what this number is what the goal is?

Tim Baker  03:24

Yeah, so huge question, Tim. I think, you know, I’m going to answer the question with with a question is, like, define optimal? Yeah. Right. So like, optimal? Well, we’ve talked about, you know, is, you know, should die with zero be the goal. And, you know, what am I mean by that is, there are a lot of people that, you know, they’ll save, save and save, and maybe the goal is to pass on some, you know, money to their heirs. You know, I always I think I’ve said it said this on the podcast before my parents have said to me, like, hey, we want to make sure that like when we die, like we we give, we give you and your siblings some money, and I’m like, I don’t expect that I don’t really need that. I’m not really banking on that at all. And maybe when I’m older, I would want the same thing for my you know, for my kids, but the die was zero concept is it’s kind of like, you know, you can’t take it with you type of thing. So you’re you’re kind of spending on your portfolio, you’re giving it away, etc, etc. And maybe there’s some, you know, maybe there’s some somewhere in between where you don’t want to be right on the on the needle there. You don’t want to be with zero. So you maybe you have a little bit more cushion. So, you know, I think I think that would be the big thing is like how do you define optimal? And then the factors I think are so important. So like, what type of lifestyle do you want? I think in a vacuum, what most people I think want is to kind of live a similar right lifestyle than what they’re living as they’re as they’re working. So they don’t necessarily want to be more lavish. They don’t necessarily want to give up things either. Unfortunately, some people have to give up things just because of you know, poor planning or they have to work longer. So you know, what, where do you want to live? What’s the geography? What’s your housing situation, that’s going to be the biggest fixed expense. The biggest expense in retirement typically is housing. You know, what are your hobbies? Activities? Are you taking care of grandkids? Are you? Are you jet setting? Are you working? Are you not working? Are you volunteering? Consulting? What does that look like? And, you know, I think from there is, you know, estimating, you know what your retirement expenses would look like? So I mentioned like, what are the fixed expenses? What are the variable expenses, which could be big trips, maybe you’re paying for kids’ weddings, maybe it’s a medical expense. And really kind of zeroing in on that. Unfortunately, Tim the B word doesn’t ever go away. Right. So understanding what your budget looks like, is, is I think an integral part of of retirement planning. There are there are rules of things and way that you can slice it, there’s some planners that will look at the tax return, and then assume like, whatever’s on last year’s tax return is what I need for this coming year. And that’s kind of a very top down approach. A bottom up approaches a budget, you can use, use a rule of thumb, like a replacement ratio. So hey, if I make $100,000 and 70, or 80% replacement ratio means that I need $70-$80,000, you know, in that in that year of retirement. Looking at accounting for inflation, so do you think inflation is going to go up? It’s going to go back down to kind of the 3% levels? The big question is, is like what’s the retirement duration? Nobody knows that, right? So, you know, some people are like, Oh, I’m gonna, you know, retire at 65. And I, maybe I have a good five or 10 years on me, most people, you know, live longer when they want, they think they’re gonna retire. And that’s probably the trickiest part about all this, unlike, you know, other types of planning that are similar to this, like education planning, we kind of know that, hey, our goal was to kind of get through four years, maybe eight years of, you know, education. Here, it could be five years, it could be 45 years. We just don’t know. And that’s kind of the the major wildcard, but then understanding like, what are your sources of retirement? Is it social security? Is it a pension? Is it a, is it an annuity that you buy? Is it your traditional portfolio? Is there other types of you know, is it real estate income, whether your cash flow in real estate, or it’s a liquidation event? Are you selling a business? Is there a part time work there? So I think all of these play into play a part in it, and then I kind of how you distribute the cash also plays and how you handle taxes. So from a distribution perspective, you know, are you looking at, you know, what we’ve talked about in the past, which is a floor and strategy, which is very conservative strategy. Is it a bucket? You know, where, you know, in this, this will be, you know, another question that we have, it’s like, how do we account for like volatility or, you know, in the market? You know, is it a bucket strategy? Or is it the systemic withdrawal strategy, where it’s, Hey, we’re distributing 4%, no matter what, or we’re being flexible, depending on what interest rates what the markets doing? So lots of different lots of different ways to kind of, you know, go about this, but I think defining like, what optimal is for you is going to be important. And again, that’s why a lot of people are like, I just want to, you know, die with zero, that plays.I think the best place to start in terms of the optimal amount of savings needed for retirement to answer that question is, I think starting with a nest egg calculation is the best the best way. It is the, it is the best way, in my estimation, to deconstruct a problem and problem is not the right word, but a scenario that is years in the future, that’s a big freakin number. So, and when I was talking about this, like when we would do retirement planning at my past firm, you’d be the client and we would say, Okay, now now’s the time to talk about your retirement. Based on our time value of money calculation, you need $3.65 million to retire. Alright, let’s talk about your insurance, onto the next thing. And we could see kind of like, maybe the color come out of your face, maybe that little glossy, you know, glassy eyed look, and just, it didn’t connect with people. So, you know, it got me thinking, how can I make this number impactful to you today in 2024? So a nest egg calculation, which says, Okay, this is the number $3.65 million, but then what does that mean to me today? And we compare it to what’s currently in your retirement portfolio? What’s your contribution rate? How was it allocated? And then how does it compare, you know, to what you potentially need. So where are we running a deficit, meaning we’re behind on that $3.65 million? Or are we ahead meaning that we’re, you know, we’re overfunded? So to me, that’s, that’s the starting place. And again, it’s not a perfect, it’s not a perfect calculation, there’s a lot of assumptions in there in terms of investment returns and inflation and actually, when you’re going to retire and when you’re potentially going to die, we’re estimating all that which you would do anyway, in any type of, you know, scenario analysis. But to me, that’s the best way I think, to make that big number that kind of unknown, a little bit more digestible. There’s other ways that you can look at it, where there’s Monte Carlo analysis where you’re looking at, you know, a randomize portfolio return or other things that are related to you know, economic variables that you can say, hey, we’re going to run 1000s of scenarios and what it shows you is, hey, you’re a 85% chance of success. And that one chance of success means is that there are assets left, at the end of the plan, whether you set that for age 90, 95, 100, or whatever that is, that kind of is the next level. The rule of thumb is, you know, what people have heard of is a 4% rule. So, you know, if you’re, if you’re looking at your optimal savings plan, and you have $500,000, in retirement, if you use 4%, that means you have $20,000, over a 25-30 year return. So you might say, Hey, that’s not enough. I need more. So obviously, the right way to reverse engineer that, Tim, is to say, Okay, what do you need, if it’s 40,000, use a 25x, ROI, you need a million dollars, and that’s just a 4% rule inverted. So to me in terms of practical things that I wish I would have a listener, you know, it’s like, okay, are you getting the match, get to that race to the 10%. So your employee contribution, again, this is a vacuum. You know, I’ve talked with prospective clients that had lots of credit card debt, and other things that are going on, I wouldn’t necessarily prescribe this for them, but you know, get to the 10% employee contribution, then eventually, you know, get to a phase where you’re maxing out, and then use IRAs or brokerage accounts to kind of supplement along the way as you can. So, but remember that this is a problem set, Tim, that I think a lot of people think that they have control over that they that they don’t. You know, there’s a there’s a stat that says 40% of people don’t work to their expected retirement age, either because of health issues, or they were eliminated from a job, etc. You know, those types of things, I think where in my mind, I’m like, probably work till I’m 70 and Shay is 65. But, you know, I could lose my marbles was between, you know, before that, like, who knows? So, you know, I think I think, the best time again, I’m a planner, so I’m biased, but I think the best time to plan is now and the sooner you can kind of look at where you’re at and kind of be able to adjust where you need to go, the better. You know, one of the things that I would always kind of lament working with at my last firm was that we only worked with like pre retirees and retirees. So people would come off the street, and they’d say, Hey, I’m 55 years old, I’d like to retire in the next five years, I have $50,000, to my name, I have credit card debt, but like, it was almost like doesn’t, it doesn’t add up the math is not mathing. And so those are yeah, those are all the kinds of things that go into this. And it’s, it’s a huge thing to kind of deconstruct but I think, you know, looking at this as in a vacuum is not necessary ideal. You want to look at all the different parts. We talked about this with our own plans, and kind of, you know, where we’re trending and things like, you know, but it’s, it’s a big question, I think, and there’s just a lot of ways that kind of, you know, look at it. Yeah,

Tim Ulbrich  12:46

The thoughts that are coming to mind, as you’re talking, Tim, is I think there’s risk here to oversimplify this and be overconfident in this. And what I mean by the over over simplification is like, you can run numbers in a calculator. But if you’re not having some of the important discussions and questions of the inputs into that calculator, then we’re not doing the work that needs to be done, right. You mentioned like what what do we mean by optimal? Like, what does that actually look like? What does it mean to be living a wealthy life and retirement? As you mentioned, some huge variables of are we working at all? Are we working part time? You know, is this 55? Is this 64? You know, might we be caring for elderly parents? What does travel look like? What are all these things? And then, you know, when we think about even that word, retirement, I think can carry meaning that you and I might look at that word and say it means two very different things, right. And so, you know, when you talk about the nest egg calculation, to me that that is where the value really lies, to me the short answer of how do you determine the amount of savings needed for retirement? Nest egg calculation, three words. But to do the nest egg calculation and put in all the inputs and variables, which again, as you mentioned, are assumptions and things might change and move. And there are things that we think we have control over that we don’t, but it’s the closest we can get, and we can modify or update that look at it over time. In order to put the numbers in the calculator, we got to have some really good conversations. And this, to me is really where the planning comes to base, we’re not just trying to shove money away into accounts that were, you know, like, somebody said, I should put money in a 401 K, or an IRA or an HSA or whatever. Or we’re looking at these big scary numbers in the future thinking, Am I ever gonna get there? Looking at the individual variables, having the discussion and the conversations, answering those questions, plugging those in. And then as you mentioned, bringing it back to today. So important. Especially for the people that you know, for someone who’s two, three years out from retirement, that may not be as critical as for someone who’s in the middle of their career, or even in the front half of their career where, you know, we got to come up with a number that I can actually put my arms around and do something with today because otherwise I’m gonna look at this number 30 years in the future 20 or 40 years in the future and say, the math just doesn’t even seem possible.

Tim Baker  14:58

Yeah, in one of the things that when we go through the Script Your Plan, which is our second second meeting, and the way that we kind of start building a financial plan, we go through what’s called a Get Organized meeting, which is we bring up the client portal. And we’re basically trying to get to like a clean snapshot of what the balance sheet looks like. So the assets, the things that you own, minus the liabilities, the things that you owe equals your net worth. And our job is to hope, you know, the idea is to kind of grow that quantifably to get your, you know, your net worth grow over time. The second piece of that is Script Your Plan, which is all about like goal setting, right? So it’s like, Okay, now that we know where we’re at, where are we going? And with those two things in place, that that answer of it depends that I always give, Tim transforms into this is given your balance sheet, given your goals, Tim, this is what I think you should do. So it’s no more It depends. Because like, we know, you, we know what your goals are, we know what your passion is, this is what your goals are. But part of that Script Your Plan exercise, when we would kind of talk about a timeline, you know, we I would ask the question of, hey, like, it’s July 2024, let’s fast forward a year, what is success? And you know, what does success look like? And then we go three years, five years, 10 years, 30 years. The further you get out, you know, the further away that you go, the harder it is for you to kind of imagine that self. So with retirement planning, you know, the way that you know, with the way that I would do this, it’s like, I kind of, you know, I would say, hey, let’s get into the DeLorean. Let’s go 88 miles per hour, rev it up, we get out in, let’s see, 2054. So it’s 30 years from now, what does success look like? And for a lot of people, it’s like, I don’t know. So I’m like, okay, like, how much? How would your dad, you know, if I’m, if I’m 40. My dad’s like, imagine yourself, as your dad, like, pitch yourself, as a seventy year old, what does success look like? So it’s just like, the next day where we’re trying to, like, equate the numbers in from a from a Script Your Plan from a lifestyle perspective is, the further that gets out, the harder it is for us to kind of relate to our 10 year older self,  20 year older self, 30 year older self. So if there is a group or a person that you know, very closely that you can say, okay, like, if I’m in their shoes, and you probably do that, anyway, I’m like, oh, like, when I’m retired, I’m not going to do what my parents are gonna are doing, or I am going to do what my parents would do. So you can kind of like, take that, but even 10 years out, Tim, if you look 10 years back, from, you know, if you look back to 2014, how much of your life has changed over those 10 years,. You know, like, like, things like time flies, but, you know, to me, it’s like, you look at, you know, time is so hard for us, as humans can conceptualize. And it’s no different in in something like this. So I think it’s like, really kind of going through those, like thought experiments and, you know, kind of assessing, because I think so much of this is really about the numbers. But when you deconstruct this, it’s really not. You know, I think, you know, if you’re working with a financial planner, again, shameless plug, I think the numbers are going to be fine. Especially if you have enough time, you know, the longer that you’re engaged with, with a plan, the more success, you know, you know, whatever version of success. It’s the people that don’t, I think is where you kind of run into problems. But to me, it’s really important to kind of deconstruct like, the answer that question is what is optimal, and then plan around that, you know, the nice thing about, you know, having decades so to speak in a financial planner, is that the micro things that you do today really steer that frigget to where you can have success, you know, in the long run, so. But it’s an interesting, you know, it’s an interesting problem set, because it is a huge number. And it’s far in the future for a lot of people, it just, it doesn’t seem real, you know, I have a lot of people that, you know, will work with us in their 20s and 30s. Like, I’ll never be able to retire. And when we show them how, you know, the math to get to that, like, I think that’s transformative. Now, I think the second piece of that is like, okay, like, what is a happy retirement? What’s a successful retirement and I think people are starting to figure that out, but it’s not necessarily a destination, right? It’s just the next chapter. And, you know, especially with sometimes pharmacists, or like highly, you know, people that are higher achievers, you know, their role and identity gets really tied up together. And it’s like, okay, if you step away from your career as a pharmacist, like, who are you? What do you do? Like you know, and that and that for some people can be really difficult to kind of again, unbolt.

Tim Ulbrich  15:42

Tim, one thing I want to say and separate topic for another day that we can dive deeper into, we’ve talked about in the show before, but when you talk about time, being hard to really, you know, wrap our mind around, especially for folks that are early in their career, you know, your 2014 examples, a really good one when I think back to 2014, like it’s a distant memory and and it feels like Yeah, we were doing some savings and things now, but if it weren’t for things like automation, you could see how a 10 year period slips by you without having the intention out. This is why we believe so firmly in automation is an important part of plan. Yes, we got to do the hard work up front. Yes, we got to check in periodically. But once we start to kind of remove ourselves from that equation, and we do that hard work, and then we turn it on, whether it’s automatic contributions, it could be automatic savings buckets or other things, that’s where we’re gonna start to really see the progress and prevent this scenario where we say, How did those 10 years go by? And I didn’t make much progress on my retirement planning?

Tim Baker  19:32

Yeah. Yeah, I think it’s so important, because we just get into this, like, autopilot and you wake up. It’s like, where did that? Where did it go? 

Tim Ulbrich  19:56

Yeah. Alright, second question we have is, what are some strategies for dealing with market downturns during retirement? If we even zoom this out a little bit more? I’m guessing this person might be asking, you know, given the volatility, certainly the markets had a good run lately, but it’s been pretty volatile, right, you know, over the last couple of years. So for those that are, you know, in what you call that eye of the storm, around retirement, or coming up on, just got to retirement, or maybe they’ve been in retirement for a period of time? How do we address and deal with some of the market volatility?

Tim Baker  21:11

Yeah, so this is market risks, and you really don’t have any control over at all outside of like, taking all your money out, you know, take your investment ball home, and, you know, and go home, right? So like, this is where people get scared, they’ll go to cash, and they typically are selling low, but then they like, oh, the markets good now, and, you know, dip my toe back in, and they’re buying high. So you know, what you’re talking about a sequence risk where is where it’s basically, you know, when the timing of your retirement, and the distribution of your retirement accounts, matters a lot. Probably more so than most of the other investment or the retirement risks that are there. So to kind of zoom out of this first, Tim, this question is, you know, what are some so the question is, what are some strategies for dealing with market downturns during retirement. So what we’re assuming here is that you are no longer in that accumulation phase, you are in the deaccumulation, that withdrawal phase. But I think like the, the, my thoughts is, are consistent no matter where you’re at. You know, to me, the big things that I look at from a retirement portfolio is I want to make sure that you’re in the right allocation, and that you’re driving the expenses down as much as possible related to your portfolio. Now, what I’m taking, typically talking about here is like expense ratio. So the right allocation is probably the optimal, you know, the optimal term in and I think, if you look at the rule of thumb, that I don’t love is the rule of thumb in terms of like, how you should have your portfolio allocated is, you take 110, you subtract your age, and that’s the amount of stocks or equities you should be in your portfolio. So if I’m 40, you take 110, minus 40. And I should be in a 70%, stock portfolio and a and a 30%, bond portfolio, which I think and it’s very much a linear thing. So as you as you age, go, 60/40, 50/50, etc, etc. I think that that’s wrong. I don’t think that that’s a great rule of thumb. I think that, to me, I look at this almost as like a, my, my strategy or my thought process is more like a cliff. So my thought is like, you know, if I’m 40 years old, and I have 30% of my allocation in bonds, I think that’s a mistake. And if we, if we zoom out, you know, if you look at stocks, and again, not all stocks are created equal, but in broad strokes, stocks are typically there’s a higher potential for growth, with a lot more volatility. Bonds or fixed income, there’s less potential for growth, but less volatility. So there’s more of an exponential growth with stocks and more of a linear growth of bonds. So, to me, what you give up during the accumulation phase, if you’re in your 40s, is you give up a lot of the market, the market is still gonna go up, but I equate it to like, if you’re in mostly equities, it’s gonna be kind of Rocky Mountain in terms of ups and downs. If you put bonds and there’s more Appalachian Mountains, there’s a little bit more, you know, you know, there’s less ups less downs, but they’re still they’re still that. So to me, I think that, uh, mostly equity, you know, again, this is not investment advice, but I think like maybe mainly in equities in your accumulation phase. And then when you get to five to ten years before and after your retirement age, that’s when you’re going to, that’s when you’re really going to manage the sequence of return risks that you mentioned. So think of that as like the eye of the storm. So let’s assume that my retirement age is 65. And I’m being as conservative from a timeline perspective, at 55. That’s when I really am going to kind of that’s what that’s the cliff where I’m going to say, Okay, I’m now no longer going to be mostly in equities. That’s where I’m going to be the most conservative and go to bonds. So instead of this glide path, where I’m going from 100% equities to 80, 90, basically, I’m not doing that over a period of years, I’m doing that right when I hit 55, and that’s where I’m going into more of a balanced portfolio, which could be a 60/40, or 50/50. And then over those years in that either storm, so 55, to 75. And the most conservative sense, that’s when you’re gonna be the most conservative in terms of your balanced portfolio. And then when you come out of the eye of the storm, that’s when you start ramping up the equities, again, whether that’s 60/40, 70/30, 80/20, which is very different than kind of the, you know, most people, it’s like, oh, you’re in your 80s, you should be in a 20/80 portfolio or whatever. And a lot of people, it’s, it’s not sustainable. So the the eye of the storm is to kind of get through the sequence of return risk. So, you know, and again, the most successful retirees are the ones that are most flexible. So if you go through like the subprime mortgage crisis, or the.com crisis, and your portfolio goes from a million to 700,000, and then you’re drawing $50,000, you know, for the next couple years, the portfolio and a lot of cases are going to fail. If you were to delay your retirement and wait for the market to recover two years later, it’s completely different scenario. So that to me, is what we’re talking about here. So you know, the strategies for dealing that is, I think the best thing is the being the right allocation is to not do what you’re feeling. So I always talk about do the opposite of how you’re feeling. So if you get scared, a lot of people should go cash and a lot of ways you should be doubling down and investing. Another thing that we’ve talked about in the in the in this forum, Tim, is something like an annuity, which is hard to really wrap people’s minds around, but like if I can peel off $300,000 from my portfolio, to supplement Social Security to say, Okay, come hell or high water, I’m gonna have the steady check between social security in my annuity, regardless of what’s going on. For that, for a lot of people, that’s a peace of mind. So like the the market volatility is not as as big a concern, because I’m like, I don’t I have all my basic necessities, necessities handled. Right. So the mental thing of like an annuity might be might be a big thing. Being flexible, as I mentioned in, it could be a bucketing approach where you’re like, hey, my, my near term bucket, my zero to five year bucket is spoken for me and I have that in cash or tips, I’m good. So I don’t care what the market does, you know, as long as it’s recovered in the next five years for me to kind of replenish that bucket. And this is where we’re basically have a short term and medium term, and then a long term bucket. So short term, zero to five, medium term, six to 15, long term 15 plus, and then those buckets kind of replenish themselves as time goes. If there’s, if we’re in a time where the market crashes, but I still have $100-$200,000 in my cash bucket, I don’t really care, I’m hoping the market will return in that period of time to replenish that cash bucket. And typically, it should. A lot of the most, you know, the Great Depression in the Great Recession, you know, those recover those market recoveries aren’t decades. They are typically, you know, two to six years, two to seven years, that type of thing. So that could be that can be something as well. So, you know, the market, the market does what the market does. And I think those are that are best positioned like they they understand that. It’s not, you know, we’re not trying to like game the market, outside of very few people in the history of the market can can beat the market and kind of, you know, foreshadow what’s going to come. So it’s, it’s being in the right asset allocation. It’s keeping your expenses low. And being consistent with that structure. I think we’ll get people through any of the see any of the seasons that you’ll see over the course of an investing career.

Tim Ulbrich  28:42

Tim, let me mention a few resources for people that want to dig deeper, and this will link to these in the show notes. It’s been a while but we did a whole series on retirement planning, digging into the question of how much is enough, some of the alphabet soup of different accounts, building a retirement paycheck, things that you’ve been talking about that was episodes 272 through 275. Again, we’ll link to that in the show notes. And then 305, episode 305. We did a primer on annuities, a lot of myths, conceptions around annuities, we try to break those down, understanding what they are: fees, costs. That was a great episode. Again, we’ll link to it in the show notes. And then several of the risks that you’ve talked about, we put together a guide that’s all around understanding retirement risks. So it’s Retirement Roadblocks: Identifying and Managing 10 Common Risks. It’s a free guide that we have available. One of the most popular resources we have, again, that will be linked to in the show notes as well. Tim, one thing that struck me is you were talking you mentioned flexibility, right is a key. And this is a piece I think that pharmacists have a benefit of, right. Many pharmacists work in a position, whether that be hospital, whether that be community practice where they have an opportunity to do something like PRN shifts or work part time and make a good income. And so, you know, maybe the game game plan was a full retirement at 55, but because of some of the things that you talked about, maybe they either choose to work longer, full time or hey, if they want to pick up 15-20 hours, making $60-$65 bucks an hour, a lot of pharmacists have the opportunity to do that. And so I think that flexibility piece can be really important, specifically to our audiences as they’re thinking about retirement.

Tim Baker  30:12

Yeah. And what I This, to me, this stat still like is unbelievable to me. So this was these two stats were put out by a paper called The Power of Working Longer published in January 2018, by Stanford’s Institute for Economic Policy Research. And basically, it makes the case for working longer. That’s the best, you know, medicine for if you have a shortfall shortfall in income for retirement. But we talked about sequence risk Tim, so we know the market. So like, let’s say, you know, you know, 65, in, you know, 20 years from now, not quite there yet. But say the market is not going great. Deferring retirement by three to six months is like saving 1% more of salary for 30 years. Deferred retirement by one month is like saving 1% more of salary for the final 10 years. So, to me, there’s I know there’s a lot of pharmacists that are listening to this that I speak to, they’re like, I need to retire as quickly as possible. And I get it, I get it, I understand. But but to me, like the people that are most flexible from a lifestyle, from a timing, are going to be the most successful in terms of their retirement. So if you have a lever that you can pull that you can consult or you can do, you know, you can do a shift or medical, right, whatever that is, you know, whatever that that is like that’s going to benefit you and over and help the overall retirement picture. So those would be two stats, I would leave you with us on this question.

Tim Ulbrich  31:44

That’s great. And it’s a balance, right? We talked about this all the time, it’s a balance between, hey, you make enough of these concessions. And you could always argue, hey, I should keep working longer, right? So we’ve got to get back to like, what’s the why, what’s the purpose, but also be in tune with those numbers, which aren’t wild when you talk about one month of employment, and the impact that it has in terms of dollars that could have been saved. Our next question: how to different investment options such as stocks, bonds, real estate impact retirement savings? And I think, Tim, this is a really interesting question, because one of the things we lose sight of when we talk about nest egg calculations, retirement planning, we talked about these big numbers, 3 million, 4 million, 5 million, is that not all dollars are created equal? Right? Both in how are they invested, and the types of investments in which they’re in and then eventually, how they’re utilized to build the retirement paycheck. So what are your thoughts here in terms of how do different investment options impact retirement savings?

Tim Baker  32:37

Yeah, so this question is really about like asset classes. So when we talk about a traditional portfolio, you know, there’s a, we talked about a high level, you know, a 90/10 portfolio and it would be 90% in stocks or equities and 10% in bonds or fixed income. That 90% you can, you can draw even a finer line, you can have large cap, mid cap, small cap, you could have international funds, you could have emerging market, you could have commodities, you could have, you know, you could have sector funds that are just in biopharmaceuticals or whatever. You could have digital assets. So, the big news this year was that they released spot Bitcoin ETFs. Last week, Tim, they released nine, eight or nine spot theoreum ETFs, which have come on the market and started trading last Tuesday. So that can be part of your your asset allocation now, because they’re, they’re in ETFs. The bonds at 10%, you could buy a total market bond, or you could buy different types. You could buy munis, you could buy treasuries, you can buy a total market and international bond, like there’s lots of ways to kind of, you know, slice it. But you can also talk to, you know, real estate, you know, one of the things is like, you know, is it real? Is it real estate, you can hold real estate in a mutual fund or an ETF, or you can hold it directly. So, to me, this kind of goes back to the one of the earlier questions is, you know, the more stocks, there’s the potential for more growth, but more volatility and risk, the more bonds less potential for growth, but less volatility and risk. So I think, at a baseline, being in the right, asset allocation from a traditional portfolio is really important. And this is what I’m talking about is, you know, should you be in an all equity or, you know, a 9010, and then hit that cliff and then go to a 60/40 or 50/50. That’s what I’m going to talk about from a traditional, but the things that we have to overlay, Tim, and I was talking about this with you a couple of weeks ago, I was kind of lamenting the fact that we talked about like tax allocation with retirement with your, your investment assets. So we kind of talked about we went a little bit in column A, Column B, Column C. Column A would be pre you know, like traditional. So pre tax, so these are, you know, traditional 401 K traditional IRA, etc. Then you want a little bit in Roth, which is kind of tax free since you’ve already paid  the taxes. So this is like And when you pour out a Roth, if you have a million dollars, all that million is yours because you’ve already paid the tax man. And then the last one is a taxable account. So I was looking at my taxable account as a percentage of my portfolio, I’m like, oh, that’s exactly where I want. Now, I don’t have any designs on retirement before 59 and a half. So I don’t really need, that’s typically what you use a taxable account for the purpose of retirement. But I know like when I sell my real estate, that’s probably going to go into a taxable account. So like, like, right now, I know the plan is, it’s kind of unequal scales, though, they’ll be equaled out in the future, or when I sell my share of our business like that will probably go into partly a savings account, but partly a long term investment, you know, in the form of a taxable account. So to me, that plays a part of this as well. So I think the the idea is to be in the right asset allocation, as opposed to what I talked about, typically, the one that you’re it’s going to be more stock heavy is going to have more volatility. So the closer you are to retirement, or in retirement, the less you’re going to want to have, although it’s still needed for the kind of that longevity risk of like not live outliving your savings. Real estate, it’s going to be typically how you know how your whole net, whether you are a landlord, or if it’s in a fund. But the things that we haven’t really talked about this, as part of this is things like digital assets, things like commodities, cash – right now, Tim, you could, you know, with our cash accounts at YFP, it’s paying like 5.1%. So I’m looking at that, and like, if I’m a retiree, if I can park, my short term bucket there, I’m pretty happy with that return. Now, I know inflation has been ticking up higher. So maybe need a little bit more to offset that. But these are all the things that kind of construct the retirement, you know, savings and retirement assets. And I think, you know, doing it with a traditional portfolio, but then overlay in some of the other things that you have going on, you know, if you have a pension, that’s going to affect how you retire, you know, your allocation is, because if you have a if you have a pension plus social security, you might not have to be super conservative, because you might say like, Hey, my, most of my things are handled, or if I buy an annuity, I can be more aggressive, because I’m not going to have to withdrawal that as aggressively as if I didn’t have that annuity or that pension. So there’s lots of different things. But I think the rule of thumb is kind of looked at your stock to bond, you know, ratio, and understand that with stocks, again, more growth, more volatility. With bonds, less growth, less volatility.

Tim Ulbrich  37:30

And I think you just gave a great example there, why blanket asset allocation recommendations don’t work, right? Because, you know, if someone’s listening, and they have a pension, and they have social security, or maybe they have an annuity, like the floor that they’ve created, is completely different from someone else that maybe doesn’t have a pension or annuity, And therefore, they’re going to rely more on withdrawing from their investments. So how much risk they take with the remaining amount of whatever’s investable, and whatever buckets they have, could be very different based on you know, what those are? And I think this question gets at a couple different aspects of asset allocation, which you talked about nicely, but also a conversation. We don’t have enough, which is that d cumulation. Building that paycheck from what buckets are we taking from and how do we do that? And what order tax strategies all those things? And I think for people are listening that maybe have done the hard work, are nearing retirement, have two, three $4 million saved whatever the number is. That’s great. Now, hey, are we thinking about the decumulation side of this?

Tim Baker  38:30

Yeah, and that was one of the reasons, Tim, after going through the CFP coursework, you know, I decided to do the Ri CP, which is Retirement Income Certified Professional, because it really tackles that question that the CFP I don’t think does the best job. CFP is all about, okay, accumulation of accumulated assets and what that looks like. But once you get to that, that’s not the destination, then the next chapter, how do you take these buckets of money and build a sustainable, sustainable paycheck over time? Unknown, right. And actually, one of the open questions in in that is like, if you do build a floor for a client, and they’re, you know, they’re a 75 year old, but their allocation is something like 90/10 or 80/20. A lot of regulators will look at that and be like, that doesn’t look right. But you know, the justification, that’s why you can’t have a blanket, you know, yeah, one rule for everyone. The justification is like, we really don’t have to draw that much from that portfolio. Because, right, the floor is the floor, right? So I remember that being kind of like, oh, that’s odd. Because, you know, again, most, most planners, they kind of they go, they get social security in place. And then they say, Okay, what’s the total return? What’s the best optimal way to get the portfolio through the all the retirement years, but it’s much more nuanced than that. And I think, you know, it’s important to understand that.

Tim Ulbrich  39:54

And that’s why for the pharmacists that are listening, that are working for an employer, like the VA or whoever that still has a pension plan, be grateful for that. They’re not they’re not common, but it’s gonna play a huge role when it comes to building that floor  and creating that retirement paycheck. We’ve got lots more retirement questions. I’m gonna hit pause there. We’ll tackle more of those in future episodes, we’ve done a lot of information in a short period of time again, we got more resources. If you’re listening to this, and I want to learn more, make sure to check out the YFP podcast again, we’ll link to some of these older episodes in the show notes. You can go back and learn more, we’ve got more information on the YFP blog as well. We have more webinars that will be forthcoming related to retirement retirement planning that Tim and the rest of the team will be leading. So be on the lookout for those as well. For those that are listening and said, Hey, I really could use some one on one help with a qualified, certified financial planner, we’d love to have the opportunity to talk with you to learn more about your situation to see whether or not what we offer is a good fit in the form of fee only financial planning and or tax planning. If you’re interested in a discovery call with Tim Baker to learn more about the services, you can go to yourfinancialpharmacist.com you’ll see a link there to book a discovery call. Thanks so much for listening, Tim. Great stuff. We’ll catch you again next week.

Tim Baker  41:03

Sounds good.

Tim Ulbrich  41:06

Before we wrap up today’s show, I want to again thank this week’s sponsor of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, First Horizon. We’re glad to have found a solution for pharmacists that are unable to save 20% for a down payment on a home. A lot of pharmacists in the YFP community have taken advantage of First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan, which requires a 3% downpayment for a single family home or townhome for first time homebuyers and has no PMI on a 30 year fixed rate mortgage. To learn more about the requirements for First Horizon’s Pharmacist Home Loan, and to get started with the pre approval process, you can visit yourfinancialpharmacists.com/home-loan again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. 

Tim Ulbrich  41:51

[DISCLAIMER] As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guaranteed of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 366: Your Medicare and Long-Term Care Questions Answered


Tim Baker, YFP Director of Financial Planning, breaks down Medicare and long-term care insurance and what to consider when deciding on a policy.

Episode Summary

Tim Baker, YFP Director of Financial Planning, breaks down the importance of long-term care insurance in retirement planning, highlighting the need to carefully consider the cost of these policies and how they fit into one’s overall financial plan. 

Tim also discusses Medicare parts A, B and D and the importance of understanding the enrollment period to avoid paying penalties.

About Today’s Guest

Tim Baker is the Co-Founder and Director of Financial Planning at Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 12,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. 

Tim attended the United States Military Academy majoring in International Relations and branching Armor. After his military career, he worked as a logistician with a major retailer and a construction company. After much deliberation, Tim decided to make a pivot in his career and joined a small independent financial planning firm in 2012. In 2016, he launched his own financial planning firm Script Financial and in 2019 merged with Your Financial Pharmacist. Tim now lives in Columbus, Ohio with his wife (Shay), three kids (Olivia, Liam and Zoe), and dog (Benji).

Key Points from the Episode

  • Medicare and long-term care insurance with questions from the community. [0:00]
  • Long-term care insurance costs and factors that affect premiums. [4:10]
  • Long-term care insurance policies, including elimination periods and riders. [10:23]
  • Long-term care insurance policies and their importance in retirement planning. [17:28]
  • Medicare penalties for late enrollment, including Part A, B, and D. [23:15]
  • Medicare changes and penalties, with tips for avoiding them. [29:40]

Episode Highlights

“Start assessing what kind of policies you want and what you want to do and what your plan for long term care in your 50s. The sweet spot to purchase a policy is in that 55 to 65 year old range. If you’re too early, you’re paying premiums for a long time and you may not reap the benefit for 20 or 30 years. If you’re too late, you’re paying much more in premiums or you could even be denied. So unlike most health insurance, you can be denied for pre-existing conditions. There’s really that zone, that sweet spot – the Goldilocks zone where you really need to kind of get this just right.” – Tim Baker [4:32]

“A lot of people think you need a 100% solution to put my kids through college or you need 100% solution for this. It’s not about that. It’s really about providing a baseline benefit for you that you can then pull the levers on other parts of your financial plan to form a fully comprehensive plan with regard to long term care.” – Tim Baker [9:58]

“I think the main misconception about long term care is that Medicare is going to cover this and it really doesn’t.” – Tim Baker [23:51]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich  00:00

Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. On this week’s episode, we take questions from the YFP community on Medicare and long term care insurance – two critical, yet often overlooked, and might I say boring, parts of the financial plan. We discussed when it makes sense to purchase Long Term Care Insurance, what policies typically cost penalties for late enrollment in Medicare and policy changes and trends for both long term care and Medicare that listeners should be aware of when planning for the future. Now as we crossed the midway point of the year, it’s a good time to check up on your financial progress for the year and dust off those goals that you set back at the turn of the new year, which perhaps feels like a distant memory at this point. Whether you’re focused on investing in the future, paying off debt, saving for kids college, or growing a business or side hustle, our team at YFP is ready to help. At YFP we support pharmacists at every stage of their careers to take control their finances, reach their financial goals, and build wealth through comprehensive fee-only financial planning and tax planning. Our team of certified financial planners and our CPA work with pharmacists all across the US and help our clients set their future selves up for success while living a rich life today. You can learn more and book a free discovery call by visiting yourfinancialpharmacist.com. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com. 

Tim Ulbrich  01:29

Tim, welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker  01:34

Good to be here, Tim. Let’s do this thing. 

Tim Ulbrich  01:36

All right. So at the time of this going live, we’re actually on our annual YFP mid year break, it’s a week that we take off every year as a team around the Fourth of July a week that we can pause, reflect, get some time with family and friends. So Tim, any any big plans for the family this year? 

Tim Baker  01:52

No, it’s interesting, Tim, I am reading Michael Hyatt’s Free to Focus and he’s like, the way to kind of become focused is to is to do less. So I think it’s a good time to kind of stop and reflect on you know, the the first part of the year and then think about, you know, what’s ahead for the second half of the year, we have some friends coming in town that have young kids, so we’ll be spending the Fourth with them, but kind of just staying home and hanging out. How about you? Any big any big plans for the Ulbrich family?

Tim Ulbrich  02:22

Yeah, we’re hitting the road. We’re going to see Jess has family up in Bowling Green, to do some fireworks, Fourth of July stuff, see her grandma, and then we’re making a trip to Buffalo. My brother and his wife put in a new pool. So we’re gonna we’re gonna enjoy that with them for a couple days and make make the most of the week. Boys are super excited, great, great age for traveling. And it should be. It should be a fun week. So hey, when you when you figure out the Free to Focus, let me know how that works. I need to figure that out. So the genesis for today’s episode is, Tim, you led a webinar for us a couple weeks ago on Medicare and long term care insurance. And you know, this is a topic that I think we often think about, of course, we know it’s important, but it’s one of those topics, both of these topics where we’re like, ah, kind of boring, like, how much do I have to really think about this part of the plan. But as you shared, I mean, the engagement, the questions, the interest was, even exceeded our expectations, which is great. And so we decided, hey, let’s do an episode that focuses specifically on the community members questions around Medicare and long term care. Now, we have talked about both of these topics on the show before. We’ll link to these in the show notes. Episode 329 I brought on Certified Insurance Counselor Josh Workman to talk about Medicare selection and optimization. He had some great insights to share from his experience helping people with Medicare selection. And then episode 296, Tim, you and I talked about five key decisions for long term care insurance. So we’re not going to rehash the background of these topics, make sure to go back and listen to those but rather jump into questions that our community had on these two topics. So, Tim, let’s start with long term care. First question, which is probably I think, the most common question, which is, when do I need this policy? Right. So what is the ideal age range to purchase a long term care policy? 

Tim Baker  04:15

And in the presentation that we did in early June, the I kind of talked about this as like the Goldilocks zone, right? So if you’re too early, it’s not great. If you’re too late, it’s not great. So the way that I have broken this out, Tim, is you start discussing this in your late 40s. Start assessing kind of policies and what you want and what you want to do and kind of what is your plan for long term care in your 50s and then really kind of get the sweet spot to purchase a policy is in that 55 to 65 year old range. If you’re too early, you’re paying premiums for a long time and you may not reap the benefit for 20 or 30 years. If you’re too late, you’re paying much more in premiums or you could even be denied. So unlike most health insurance, you can be denied for pre-existing conditions. So there’s really that, that zone, that sweet spot, so to speak, is the Goldilocks zone where you really need to kind of get this just right. And again, if you’re, you know, if you have chronic issues, maybe you do that earlier. But I think one of the questions we’ll talk about, what do these premiums look like, and I kind of have these different age bands, so we can kind of talk about that. But, you know, started discussing in your late in your late 40s, kind of start assessing, you know, your plan and 50s. And then and then have a policy that meets that plan, you know, in that 55 to 65 year range.

Tim Ulbrich  05:42

So, Tim, we’re officially in the decade, you said end of forties. So something we’ll be thinking about here in the not not too distant future, which is hard to believe. But let’s talk about costs, right? Because I think sometimes these policies certainly can have some sticker shock. Everyone’s situation, of course, is different. But what are we looking at in terms of average premiums of a standard long term care policy?

Tim Baker  06:06

Yeah, so before I get into that, like, I think one of the I think this was Lincoln Financial, you know, did it did a study that that showed, like, what couples are willing to spend on long term care insurance, I think, I think the number was like $2500 to $3,000 per year in premiums. So I had that in the back of my mind, as I was kind of researching, you know, this. So according to the 2023 Long Term Care Insurance Price Index, that’s put out by the American Association for long term care insurance,  AALTCI. General estimates, and this is for this is for a policy that has an initial benefit amount of $165,000, it grows at 3%, compound inflation. So that’s kind of the general baseline. At age 55, for a single male individual, those premiums range from $1700 to $2,100 per year. So obviously, you’re in that that range of $2500 to $3000. Single females, unfortunately, ladies, your premium jumped quite a bit, you tend to live longer than men. Single female, it’s actually $2675 to $3,600. And then a shared benefit, so a couple that kind of combines their benefit together is is $3,000 to $4,800. So that’s at age 55. It jumps age 60, for a single male goes from $2100 to $3000. So that’s up from $1700 from $2100, single female jumps from $2675 to $3600, to $5000. And then the couple $3800 to $5500 combined. And then lastly, it’s 65, single male $2600 to $3135. So that’s a jump from the $2100 to $3000, single male $4230 to $5265, and then the couple $5815 to $7150. So, and I would say, Tim, that the factors are influencing these premiums, the probably the big one here is going to be the inflation protection. So it’s probably the most the most expensive rider that’s out there. And if you actually tie it, I don’t even know if they sell them. I don’t think they sound like this. But they’re they’ve been insurance products in the past to actually tie it to the CPI. I think they don’t necessarily do that. It’s like how you pick a 1% 2% 3% 4%. That’s going to drive the biggest cost to the to the you know, to the premium. Age of purchase, obviously, as we kind of outlined here is a big factor your health so health are healthier individuals will qualify for better rates, the benefit amount and duration. So a highly highly daily benefit or a bigger benefit pool. And a longer, you know, longer period won’t increase your premiums, elimination periods. Will I think it talks about this another in another question, the shorter the elimination periods and think about this as a time deductible or a deductive deductible that’s in time, results in higher premiums. I mentioned the inflation protection and then additional riders so, you know, other things that could be outside of inflation, shared care will increase the cost. So these are kind of the factors but you know, I think almost all being equal, you know, if we were to strip away the 3%, which again, that’s a major rider, I think they’d become a little bit more affordable. And I think if you’re looking at a baseline policy that that will allow you to age in place, meaning like age in your home as long as humanly possible. I think if you can look at these policies almost as like a coupon for that care. Not that you know, we talked about this. A lot of people think like oh, I need 100% solution to put my kids through college or I need 100% solution for this. It’s not about that it’s really about providing a baseline benefit for you that you can then pull the levers on other parts of your financial plan other other, you know, assets that you have to then, you know, form a fully comprehensive plan with regard to long term care.

Tim Ulbrich  10:22

Yeah. And Tim, as you share that, it reminded me of bringing Cameron Huddleston, on the show who wrote mom and dad, we need to talk we had her on episode 321. Navigating some of those financial conversations with aging parents, and some listening might might be thinking about this as the coverage for themselves. Some listening might be thinking about this as, hey, what about my parents, right, that are aging? What what do they have in place, and obviously, there can be a direct line from their coverage or lack thereof and their own financial plan. And so, you know, when you’re talking about the different factors that can affect the cost to me, but I also hear in there is like, we’ve got to zoom out and understand, like, what are the desires and the needs? What what is the goal in terms of long term care, obviously, things may happen or not as we would like them to happen. But having some clarity on you mentioned, like care in the home versus a facility type of care, like, those conversations are going to be really important for us to think about individually, but also with our parents to then look at some of these policies and determine, you know, what we want these policies to be doing in the coverage.

Tim Baker  11:25

Right. Yep, exactly, right.

Tim Ulbrich  11:28

You mentioned riders a couple times before we go to the next question. Can you can you just define that for those that may that may be a new term as they’re looking at insurance policies?

Tim Baker  11:37

Yes, riders are things that they’re like, the kind of like, add on features. So when an insurance writer, you know, wanting like, like for a life insurance policy, a permanent policy, or a disability policy could be like a waiver of premium. So like, if you have if you’re deemed disabled, you could put a rider in that policy that basically says, if you are disabled, the policy will remain remain in force, however, you don’t have to pay the premium. For for the what we’re talking about is cost of living. As you know, things increase every year and inflation goes up, the policy kind of keeps pace with inflation, or at least there’s a flat rate. So all a writer is is a additional feature that’s bolted onto the policy that makes it more enticing to the policyholder holder. However, it often comes with expense, you know, it comes with an additional premium that’s tied to that. So that’s all rider is.

Tim Ulbrich  12:43

Great stuff. So we talked about what’s the ideal age range, we’ve talked about the average premiums, what goes into that costs, several different factors. You mentioned, some of those riders, age of purchase health, what the actual policy entails elimination period. Let’s talk about elimination period. That was one of the other questions that came through is, you know, is there an elimination period with a long term care policy similar to what folks might be familiar with with a long term disability policy? So if you could first define elimination period? And then answer that question?

Tim Ulbrich  13:11

Tim, as you’re sharing all of these nuances and details regarding long term care insurance policies, you know, as can be the case with buying insurance, right, you pull back the onion. And there’s another question to consider, another question to consider what the policy should be made up of which all informs the cost, right? And what we have to answer the question when it comes to insurance, whether it’s long term care, or long term disability life, whatever we’re talking about is, what do we need? And what do we not need? Right, because obviously, we want to have a certain level of protection, that’s going to protect the rest of our financial plan. But we also don’t want to be overspending on premiums so there’s an opportunity cost that those dollars can be used elsewhere in the financial plan. And I think this is important point to selfishly plug, the work that we do and other fee-only financial planners were when you’re engaging in that work in a fee-only relationship, meaning that you’re paying the advisor for the advice that they’re giving. And there’s not a compensation stream coming from the recommending of products that may or may not be in your best interests, we really can sit down and have these conversations of what do you need, what you not need, without there being a bias in the advice that’s been given. So important.

Tim Baker  13:11

Yeah, so the elimination period, as I mentioned, is kind of like, think of this as like, when you get in a car accident, and you are, so your deductible is $500, or $1,000. You have to pay that, you know, as part to kind of access the policies policy. So if I have a, you know, an accident, and I need work on my car, that cost, you know, $2000, for that, for the policy to pay out that $2000, I have to actually pony up the deductible, which is, you know, 500, or whatever it is. So it’s it kind of what it what it what it’s meant to do is create somewhat of a barrier to care, they don’t want these policies don’t want to be accessed or have claims against if they’re if they’re nominal or minimal. So in a long term care insurance policy, you pay that in time. So to back up, when we talked about when you know, the process of purchase and long term care, I kind of broke this up into five steps, it’s actually deciding when to purchase a policy which we talked about, it’s to choose kind of a monthly benefit. The third one is a truce of deductible, which I’ll break down here in a second and then four and five is that decide how long the benefit will be paid. And then the fifth one is decide, you know, what is what riders you want? Do you want an inflation rider or not? So, to go back to step three of choose a deductible, deductibles come kind of in all shapes and sizes. So in terms of a time you can get a deductible, that is, you know, the elimination period I should say that the deductible and time that is 30, 60, 90, 180 or 365 days out. The most common is 90. So the idea behind this is, once once a professional physician says, you know, Hey, Tim, you need help with assisted daily living, like the task of transferring or eating or whatever, then that’s when the clock starts. So if I have a 90 day elimination period, and the doctor determines that July one, then essentially on October one, and sometimes it takes another month to actually get the benefit, you know, October one or November one, that’s when actually the policy starts to pay out. Now, what I just described was a calendar based a calendar day elimination period, there’s really two types, there’s calendar day. And then there’s service day. So the calendar day is based on the total number of days from the start of needing care, i.e. that physician says, hey, Tim, you need care, regardless of how often you use services, as opposed to a service day elimination period, which is based on the actual number of days he received paid care. So think about when you think about long term care, it’s often intermittent care, you don’t have someone around the clock, maybe they come in, you know, three days a week to clean and help you do some things around the house. So there’s pros and cons on each on each, right. So if you have a service day, service day care, if you have a 90 day service day elimination period, and you receive care three times a week, it would take approximately 30 weeks to meet the 90 day. So we’re versus like, if you have you know, on that first example, July one, I need care, you know, October 1, I’m getting, you know, I’m getting my policy to pay. So, you know, there’s pros and cons of each, you know, typically the calendar days going to be more expensive than the service day. You know, if you if you only need intermittent care, and it’s it’s maybe even less than, you know, weekly, you need it, you know, once a week or whatever it is, and the maybe the service day, you know, works. So this, these these elimination periods is all about trying to find, again, the Goldilocks zone for what type of care you need, what you what you want to pay for your policy, and then adjusting it for that. So that’s the elimination period, Tim. So again, most common is the 90 day. I think, I’m not sure what is more common between service and calendar day, I think if you want more of a known timeline, then calendar is kind of what you want. But then, you know, again, that’s probably going to be more expensive when it comes to paying the premium. That you have the the overlap between advice and the sale of a product, there’s going to be a conflict of interest, because often often that sale of a product, you know, means there’s a commission that’s in place. And yeah, and I’ll bring up one of the things. You know, I feel like when I was presenting, you know, I think the the latest data says that a couple, a couple that’s age, age 65, see if I can bring up the number. A couple that’s a retired couple age 65 can expect to spend after tax $315,000 on health care and medical expenses during retirement.

Tim Ulbrich  19:14

After tax. 

Tim Baker  19:15

Right. So and I think you might look at that be like, Oh, that’s not that bad. But like, a lot of people I look at that. I’m like, that’s a that’s a significant chunk of my, you know, traditional, like portfolio. Right? So and then the thing with this is that, you know, the last time I looked at this a year or two ago, like these numbers, they’ve jumped significantly. So, I think again, you know, if you’re and this is like if you think about like the biggest cost in retirement is really not like health care and medical expenses, it’s housing. So you know, if you think about this plus housing and that’s a significant chunk of a lot of people’s, you know, retirement nest eggs. So the the idea of behind, you know, long term care is to provide a baseline, again, you know, simple math, you know, you could spend $3,000 for 30 years and you know, spend, you know, $90 grand and give you that baseline, and again, you know, it can change. But to me, it’s about, again, getting those products in place for the plan that you’re trying to design without kind of some of those strings that you mentioned that are attached to that. So. Yeah. 

Tim Ulbrich  20:27

Yeah, this is you’re talking, it’s all good reminder for me, you know, my conversation with my parents. We’ve had an open conversation. I know they have a long term care policy, I don’t know the nuances of the policy. I know they’ve been diligent in that work. I know, it’s something they’ve talked about, they’ve they worked through intensely. But obviously, the the next level of that is to really ensure that my brother and I have a understanding of what’s there as well. Before we move on to Medicare, last question, related to long term care is, are there any recent policy changes or trends in long term care insurance that our listeners should be aware of when planning for their future?

Tim Baker  21:06

Yeah, I kind of see three, the big one I mentioned already, is, I think there’s a big push towards the aging in place initiatives, the the longevity of a person of a patient increases, when they can age in their home for as long as possible. And actually, a lot of these policies, Tim, are really designed to provide as much care and benefits to do that. So whether that’s setting up things like ramps or handrails or modifying the home to make it better, to, you know, again, have more of a focus on in home care than in a facility, once you pivot to a facility. You know, it’s it’s, it’s, it’s better for you to stay in home as long as possible. So there’s, there’s a growing focus on aging in place programs. And also that include kind of like wellness interventions like home modifications, and, you know, use of technology to monitor health and provide care remotely, so kind of more of a telehealth type of stuff. The second one is shift into more like hybrid policy. So there’s an increase in preference for hybrid long term care policies, which are often combining long term care benefits with life insurance or annuities. So, you know, if you were to decide to peel off, you know, a couple $100,000, a quarter million dollars of your, of your retirement portfolio to create a baseline floor, so you know, what you get for security plus, what this annuity pays you for the rest of your life, there’s, there are riders that you can put in that also provides long term care. So these policies policies offer more flexibility. And it’s, it’s, it’s less about, like, a lot of people with really annuities and long-cares, like, you know, you kind of lose it if you don’t use it, right. So making them more attractive to consumers, compared to kind of a traditional policy. Right. So that’s, that’s, that’s another one is kind of that hybrid approach. And then the third one, is, we’re starting to see more chatter and action initiatives for public long term care programs. So states, like Washington have introduced public programs, called Washington’s called the Washington Cares Fund, which began payroll contributions in July of 2023. And the basically what they’re trying to do is provide basic long term care benefits to residents. So they have something in place, because I think the the main misconception about long term care is that Medicare is going to cover this and it really doesn’t. So I think certain certain state governments are looking at this as a way to set aside money for residents to have some type of benefit in place for the purpose of providing, you know, long term care.

Tim Ulbrich  24:15

Great stuff, Tim. A topic, we’re going to continue to come back to, as I know, there’s lots of questions out there from the community. And since you mentioned annuities in that second update, and you know, we’ve talked before about that concept of creating a retirement paycheck, creating a floor between social security and annuities, whether or not that’s the right fit is another discussion, but we did talk about annuities on episode 305. Understanding annuities, we did a primer for pharmacists. So if folks are hearing that are like, oh, I want to want to learn more. We’ve covered that before we’ll link to that in the show notes. Tim, let’s shift gears to talk about Medicare. And again, we’ve discussed this briefly on the show before, Episode 329 with Medicare selection and optimization. Many pharmacists are aware of the different parts of Medicare from the work that they do every day. So let’s jump into some specific questions. The first one being for Medicare Part D, is there, (D as in dog), is there a penalty if you delay applying?

Tim Baker  25:14

Yeah, so so Medicare Part D is for a prescription drug plan. So yes, there is a penalty if you delay enrolling in Medicare Part D, the late enrollment penalty is an additional amount added to your Part D premium. And it’s calculated based on the length of time you went without Part D. The big thing here, Tim, is that it’s permanent. So once that penalty hits, it’s gonna hit as long as you have a Part D. So the way they calculate it, this, it’s 1% of the national base premium beneficiary premium for each full month, you went without coverage. So, and this goes up and changes every year. So as an example, the in 2023, the National base beneficiary premium was $32.74. So it’s not a ton of money. 1% of that is 33 cents. But you know, if you miss three months, that’s a whole whole dollar that you’re permanently paying on top of that. So it adds up, it’s one of those things that you don’t want to miss. So this is again, if you if you forego enrolling in Part D, you want to make sure that you do that when you’re you know, general enrollment comes up. So that’s that’s the penalty for part D. 

Tim Ulbrich  26:29

I think getting out in front of this, I’ve observed this time with my father-in-law and in my conversations with Josh, that we had on the show, Episode 329. This is just a big decision. You mentioned the permanent penalty, but also, this is people getting flooded with all types of information. Right? You know, I think there can be a paralysis just with the overwhelming amount of information. So starting this process early, making sure you’re doing research working with professionals that really understand this and have your best interests in mind is, is huge. The second question is what are the potential penalties for late enrollment in Medicare Part A, B, and D, we talked about D already. And are there any exceptions or circumstances where these penalties can be waived?

Tim Baker  27:09

Yeah, so so for Part A, most people don’t pay a premium for Part A, that’s kind of what your, you know, your payroll taxes already where you pay into Medicare while you’re working. However, some people do, do and if that’s the case, you have a monthly premium that may go up by by 10%. And you have to pay the higher premium for twice the number of years, you could have had Part A but you didn’t sign up. So again, most people, they’re going to, they’re going to dodge this because they’re not going to pay a premium for Part B. Again, just like Part D is that there is a penalty, and it’s permanent. So if you don’t sign up for Part B when you’re eligible. So this is your Part A is your hospital insurance, Part B is kind of easier is your outpatient, the penalty is added to your monthly Part B. So you calculate the this by looking at the penalty is 10% of the standard Part B premium. And I think in 2023, that premium was essentially $165, $164.90. So 10% of that, that that can add up, right. So and then the duration, you have to pay this penalty for as long as you have Part B the penalty is permanent and will be added to your premium. So if you delayed signing up for Part B for two years, your penalty would have been 20%- two years times to 10% of the standard premium. So in this example, your monthly premium would be a penalty, it would have been $164.90. But then, because you waited two years, the new premium is $197.88 cents. So more dire than prescription higher premiums, probably more punitive penalty. So this is really important as you are approaching your window. So just a reminder, you know your window, it’s the month before and after your eligibility date, so I should have this here. Here we go. So individuals that age 65, it’s a seven month period. So it’s three months before you turn age 65. The month you turn 65 and then three months after you turn 65 is your general or is your initial enrollment period. And that’s where you really want to make sure that you enroll in A, B and D at a minimum to avoid the penalties.

Tim Ulbrich  29:40

Great stuff there. Last question we have on Medicare, same one we heard on the long term care insurance side. Are there any recent policy changes or trends in Medicare that individuals should be aware of when planning for the future? And I guess we should say as we talked today, there’s a presidential debate tonight. I’m guessing this will become a topic in the presidential elections as it often is. So some of that will be hearsay, but anything that has been solidified or any changes that folks should be aware of?

Tim Baker  30:07

Yeah, and I’m going to answer this, Tim. And I want to go back to some of the exceptions that I didn’t answer for the question before. So the really the only things that I’m seeing for part D in for Medicare is related to part D. So starting this year, the 5% co-insurance requirement for Medicare Part D enrollees will be eliminated. So, I think what they’re what they’re trying to do is, is really go after high cost medications. So this is meant to reduce out of pocket. Beginning in 2025, though, there’ll be a $2000 annual out of pocket spending cap for part D, which will also provide significant savings with regard to high prescription drug costs. And then the two other trends that I’m seeing, is ones around consumer protection. So they really want the government really wants to kind of crack down on deceptive marketing practices. And so they don’t, they don’t want you know, companies that, you know, talk about these plans to kind of mentioned specific plans, and more oversight for like agent and broker monitoring to kind of, to kind of reduce predatory behavior. So kind of, you know, they want to prevent seniors from being pushed into a plan that they don’t necessarily want or need. And then the expansion of telehealth and digital health education is another thing in Medicare that they’re trying to, to focus on. To go back to the second part of the question that I didn’t answer, where the penalties can be waived. There are certain circumstances where the penalties can be waived. So if you are if you or your spouse are still working, and you have health care coverage through your employer, you can sign up for Part A during a special enrollment period without a penalty. And the special enrollment period typically lasts for eight months, after employment ends, or the group health coverage ends, whichever happens first. For part B, it’s the same thing. If you have, you know, coverage through an employer, that that can be, you know, something that, you know, avoids the penalty. And then Part D, if you have if you have like, coverage through your employer or TRICARE, or you’re a veteran, that, that that will waive the penalty. And then if you are in a disaster zone, like a disaster, like they’ll give you like a waiver for the penalty, if you can kind of prove that you were there or the extra help. It’s kind of a low income subsidy. If you didn’t sign up for Medicare, that’s another waiver. But you know, typically, outside of those, you’re gonna you’re gonna see that penalty. So that the kind of round out that second question there, Tim.

Tim Ulbrich  32:49

Great stuff. Tim. Lots of questions and engagement from the community on this topic. Be on the lookout – we have more webinars coming throughout the year, you can always find information on our website, yourfinancialpharmacist.com. If you’re subscribed to our newsletter, you’ll get updates there as well. We’d love to have you attend one of our future webinars covering a wide array of different financial topics for pharmacists at all stages of the career. And if you have a question on these two topics or another question, feel free to send us an email [email protected]. Again, [email protected]. And we’ll try to tackle that on an upcoming episode of the podcast. Now as we cross the midway point of the year, it’s a great time to check up on your financial progress for the year and dust off some of those goals that you set back at the turn of the new year. If you’re like me that perhaps feels like a distant memory at this point in the year. Whether you’re focused on long term care insurance and Medicare like we talked about today, or investing for the future paying off debt saving for kids college growing a business or side hustle. Our team at YFP is ready to help. At YFP we support pharmacists at every stage of their careers to take control of their finances, reach their financial goals and build wealth through comprehensive fee-only financial planning and tax planning. You can learn more and book a free discovery call with Tim Baker by visiting yourfinancialpharmacist.com. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com. Tim, great stuff. We’ll be again back again next week.

Tim Baker  34:12

Yeah, sounds good.

Tim Ulbrich  34:16

As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute your permits as of the date published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacists Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 349: Your Top 3 Questions Answered by a CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNER™


YFP’s Tim Baker addresses key questions from the community, covering retirement savings, cost of living, and the importance of the nest egg calculation.

Episode Summary

On this week’s episode of the YFP Podcast, host Tim Ulbrich is joined by YFP Co-Founder and Certified Financial Planner, Tim Baker, to dive into some of the most common questions from the YFP community. He covers topics ranging from debt repayment to investing and retirement planning in three key questions:

  • How much do I need to save in order to retire? How do I determine what is enough?
  • The intricacies of cost of living and understanding the income you’ll have in retirement.
  • Why the nest egg calculation is crucial in financial planning.

Our discussion also delves into the pros and cons of paying off low-interest debt, such as student and auto loans, versus investing. Tim Baker also shares the strategies for prioritizing debt repayment, retirement savings, and saving for a house down payment.

In a particularly insightful segment, Tim and Tim tackle a question from a listener with a $200,000 student loan balance, where Public Service Loan Forgiveness (PSLF) isn’t an option. Tim Baker shares his perspective on weighing the decision between paying off the loans and pursuing forgiveness over 20-25 years, including the potential tax implications.

Join us as we navigate the complexities of financial planning and empower you to make informed decisions for a secure financial future.

About Today’s Guest

Tim Baker is the Co-Founder and Director of Financial Planning at Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 12,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. 

Tim attended the United States Military Academy majoring in International Relations and branching Armor. After his military career, he worked as a logistician with a major retailer and a construction company. After much deliberation, Tim decided to make a pivot in his career and joined a small independent financial planning firm in 2012. In 2016, he launched his own financial planning firm Script Financial and in 2019 merged with Your Financial Pharmacist. Tim now lives in Columbus, Ohio with his wife (Shay), two kids (Olivia and Liam), and dog (Benji).

Key Points from the Episode

  • Debt repayment, investing, and retirement planning.
  • Retirement savings and investment strategies.
  • Retirement planning and nest egg calculation.
  • Retirement planning and the “Nest Egg Exercise” to connect long-term goals with current actions.
  • Prioritizing debt and investing strategies.
  • Prioritizing debt payoff vs. investing for financial freedom.
  • Financial planning and prioritizing goals.
  • Managing $200,000 in student loans without PSLF.
  • Student loan debt and financial planning.

Episode Highlights

“I think what, what sometimes happens, Tim, is that we try, we try to do a lot. We try to do a little bit of a lot of things versus a lot of like one or two things. Yeah. So I think working with a planner to help you prioritize is going to be really important.” – Tim Baker 

“So I think the best thing, and we we’ve done this a lot, and when we speak, Tim, the best I think way to determine if we’re on track to retire is to do a nest egg nest egg calculation” – Tim Baker

“But I do think that that push and pull between today and tomorrow is really important. So let’s focus on that trip to wherever; let’s focus on the down payment for a real estate property or whatever that is, like those things, I think, have to be part of the plan as well.” – Tim Baker

“The cons of paying off debt, I think, is the opportunity costs of, like, what you might miss in terms of if you were to invest that, especially if the interest rates are really low, and then just kind of just overall money,less money for investments. The pros, I think, of investing, is potentially higher returns, although not guaranteed, compounding growth, potential tax benefits, if you’re putting in things like 401Ks and IRAs.” – Tim Baker

 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich  00:00

Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, YFP Co-Founder, Director of Financial Planning and Certified Financial Planner Tim Baker joins me to answer your top three financial questions. During the show we tackle pros and cons of paying off low interest rate debt versus investing strategies to optimize student loan repayment for those not pursuing Public Service Loan Forgiveness and how to determine how much one needs to save for retirement. Before we jump into the show, I want to make sure that you’re aware of our next YFP Open House that I’m hosting on Thursday, March 14 at 8:30pm. Eastern. If you’re wondering how working one-on-one with a financial planner can help you achieve your financial goals, the best place to begin is by signing up for our open house. You can do so by visiting YourFinancialPharmacist.com/openhouse. 

During this open house, we’ll help you gain clarity on your vision for living a rich life and how the financial plan can become the engine for achieving that vision. We’ll also help you determine how much is enough when it comes to retirement planning whether or not you’re on track. I’ll be taking the group through nest egg calculation. You can learn about the nuts and bolts of hiring a financial planner including what to look for different types of planners that are available and why fee-only planning matters.

And finally, we’ll cover an overview of YFP services, including our financial planning, and tax and accounting services. Make sure to sign up to attend live. We won’t be recording this workshop. For those that attend, they’ll receive an interactive workbook as well as a free resource: Where Should My Next Dollar Go? that will help you assess your overall financial well being and provide clarity on how to efficiently deploy cash, avoid overspending and prioritize various goals. Again, you can register for this Open House on Thursday, March 14 at 8:30pm Eastern by visiting YourFinancialPharmacist.com/openhouse. Alright, let’s jump into today’s episode. 

Tim Ulbrich  02:04

Hi there, Tim Ulbrich here. Welcome to this week’s episode of the YFP Podcast. I’m excited to welcome Tim Baker back to the mic as we’re gonna put him on the hot seat with some rapid fire Q&A with some of those common questions that we get from our community, including those around debt repayment, investment, and retirement planning. Hey, Tim, it’s been a while since we’ve had you on the show, what’s new, what’s exciting?

Tim Baker  02:24

What’s new? We’re in the throes of tax season. So I’m, we’re busy there. I’m talking to a lot of potential clients coming on board. Baby number three is about a month away, Tim. So we’re preparing for that. I joke we have about 1000 projects that we have to complete before the baby gets here. So you know, kind of maneuver in my my wife’s lifts list here. So but yeah, all good. Thanks. No complaints.

Tim Ulbrich  02:55

Well, we’re excited to jump into these questions. I know it’s a busy season for you, busy season here for YFP as you mentioned in the midst of tax season. And, you know, we’ve been, we’ll talk at the end of this episode about our YFP Plus community, our new community that we’ve been offering now for a few months. And it’s been really exciting to see the questions and the engagement that that group has, and one another jumping in answering those questions. And we wanted to pull three of the most common questions that we get, whether it’s inside of that community, whether it’s, Tim, questions that we get when we’re speaking that come up on repeat. And so they may be variations of these, but you know, common questions around things like hey, how much do I need to have saved for retirement? What are the pros and cons of paying off debt versus investing? That’s probably the most common question that we get. And, you know, what should I do with my student loans? And how can I best optimize the repayment strategy? So let’s jump into these one by one. Tim, the first question that we have is a big one, but how much do I need to save in order to retire? How much is enough? And how do I begin to determine what that number is?

Tim Baker  03:57

Yeah, so I mean, it depends. Just gotta get that out of the way, right. I mean, this is such a multivariable thing. I think it’s just really hard to determine, you know, without a, you know, pretty deep level analysis to be honest Tim, you know, I know, you know, I’ll talk through some rules of thumb here and things like that. But, you know, like I was talking to a couple last night, and, you know, I think the the wife, the pharmacist was, like, you know, I kind of want the same level of comfort in retirement that I have today in terms of like my standard of living and the husband, the spouse, was like, I could live in a tent and be completely content. You know, so like, so like, that’s, that’s a big thing. You know, like if, if what your need is in retirement, you know, you could have enough saved today, Tim,  like it’s it really don’t know. So the variables there, some of the variables could be you know, the standard of living the time in retirement. There’s a lot of clients that we work with that like, will say like, Hey, like I don’t know how long I’m going to be around because of my family history. So we, you know, we put that in, in in play, taxes, inflation unexpected, you know, expenses, a lot of that can be medical, even the inability to work so that, you know, a lot of people, when they’re when they’re doing this calculus, they’ll say, Oh, I’ll work till 70. Or I’ll work part time. And the stats say that 40% of the people out there are going to going to stop working earlier than they think that they do. So you know, what I always do, there’s, there’s lots of fancy ways to kind of calculate this. And you know, if you’ve ever heard of Monte Carlo analysis, this is where we, we simulate portfolio returns 1000s of simulations and say, with, you know, X percent probability of success, we typically want, anywhere from 70 to 80% probability of success, you might say, Tim, why not 100%. Typically, if we’re, if we’re lower than, you know, 70%, we’re going to adjust the plan accordingly, in real time to get it to the end of that.

So I think the best thing that and we we’ve done this a lot, and when we speak, Tim, the best I think way to determine if we’re on track to retire is to do a nest egg nest egg calculation. And this was really born out of, Tim, like, back in the day, when I started advising people on their on their, you know, retirement stuff. What I learned from a mentor is we would say, hey, based on your based on these assumptions, you need $3.5 million to retire. And then we would just move on to the next thing. And I would see the, the look in people’s eyes were like, that number just didn’t hit the mark at all, like it was just like, it was kind of equated to like student loans where it’s just like Monopoly money, that doesn’t make any sense to me at all. So what I started to do is I would take that number, and then I would kind of use another time value of money calculation to discount it back to a number. So if you’re the client, Tim, a number for Tim in 2024, that actually is digestible to you, that’s palatable to you that says, okay, like that makes sense. And typically, what we’re doing is that we’re comparing, you know, what you’re putting into your 401 K, your IRAs, what you already have, you know what your allocation is, so we can kind of make some assumptions on performance returns, how long you’re going to work. And then we can say, hey, you’re on track by this amount of dollars per month, or you’re off track by this amount of dollars per month. And obviously, that that hill gets steeper, if we’re off track, the closer that we get to our target. So, to me that that’s a huge thing to actually connect the dots to, like when I ask people like, are they on track? A lot of people say I have no idea or they’ll say, like, I’m using a calculator, that typically is not a great indicator of where they’re at. So, but I think a lot of this goes back to kind of, you know, move the answer forward is like, you know, what do you need, you know. A lot of the estimates, you know, a lot of the estimates will say, you know, a lot of retirement planners will say, hey, you need 70 to 80% of your pre-retirement income in retirement. And that’s typically the reason for that. It’s like, you’re typically saving 20, 30% of your income, pre retirement, like so leading up to the years of retirement. And you’re not doing that in retirement. So, but a lot of that, Tim, also misses the mark, right? Because it’s like, alright, well, if I’m, like, 20-30 years from retirement, what does that even mean to me? Right. But if you take, you know, I did a kind of a, an example here, if you’re making $125,000 today, and you have a 30 year career ahead of you, and you get a 3% cost of living adjustment every year, in 30 years, that equals $303,400.00. Three or three 400.

Tim Ulbrich  08:55

Almost hard to believe, right? When you when you put the numbers on that.

Tim Baker  08:58

Yep, But then if you look back 30 years, like look back at, like, what a total cost of like a house was or like, what the… you know what I mean? Like, so you have to, you know, it’s perspective, right? So, so 30% of that $303 is about $212. So, essentially, what you need is $212 for 30 straight years, so every year $212. And then we had to, you know, account for inflation and things like that. 

Tim Ulbrich  09:22

$212,000?

Tim Baker  09:24

 $212,000. Right. So you need a portfolio. So if you just do it in simple terms to earn 12 times 30 Like, that’s kind of like, that’s a very, you know, linear way to look at it. But then you have to, you know, factor in things, you know, like variable expenses and things like that. So, what a lot of people will point to which, I don’t love it, because I think it can steer people wrong, but I think at least gets a like a foundation of where to think about this is the 4% rule. So the 4% rule is, you can withdrawal 4% of your savings in the first year retirement adjusted for inflation ever year thereafter, to ensure that your saving, you have enough saved for 30 years. So the way to kind of backwards plan to that is if you multiply your annual retirement expenses, so let’s say you need 40, that let’s say you need $60,000 per year, let’s say 20,000 of that comes from Social Security, then we need $40,000. $40,000 times 25 years, so we’re just doing the 4% inverted is a million dollars, or a million dollars times, you know, point 0.44% is that $40,000. So that’s a way to look at it. But again, like, I don’t know, if that does a great job of, you know, planning for longevity, you know, there’s a lot of there’s a lot of errors in that, you know, in that assumption, but I think it’s a good place to start thinking about this. So, I mean, it’s a, it’s a really big question that has a lot of, you know, at anytime that you look at something over, you know, 2030 years, I guess, if you’re closer to this, maybe maybe the questions a little bit easier to answer, but, you know, looking at expenses, you know, looking at budget, the budget never goes away, you know, people are like ugh budget, you know, scenario analysis, I think all of those things kind of play into this. 

Tim Ulbrich  11:10

Again, this is why I love as you mentioned, the the nest egg exercise, you can see the connections that people start to make in that exercise. Now, of course, especially if we’re looking over a long horizon, right, 20-30 years out, or even if it’s 10 years out, like things are going to change, this is not a one and done, you know, type of thing. We’ve got to be looking at it on a regular basis. But when you’re able to take people from that overwhelming shock number, right, 3 million, 4 million, 5 million to as you said, Hey, here’s what we need to be doing this year and actually, this month. Like this is what we need to be doing based on what we have saved, based on a set of assumptions that we obviously have to think through and think about risk tolerance, capacity, all those kinds of things, based on what we choose to assume or not with Social Security, you know, based on what you’re getting through your employer, all these things are going to feed into where we at currently, and what do we need to be doing per month. And, you know, I did this recently, during an Open House that we did in February, I’ll be doing it again, in our next open house coming up on on March 14, again, you can register for that yourfinancialpharmacist.com/openhouse.

And what’s fascinating about that is I can see this come to life, when people start to just see how these numbers are calculated and see the assumptions in place. Because, again, we’re actually making it mean something today, right? When we look at a number per month, we can start to see how that does or doesn’t fit in with the budget, we might not like that number. But we can start to actually work with that. And in fact, sometimes we find out through this exercise that people are over saving, you know, and there’s a conversation to be had there about, hey, how do we feel about it? What other goals are happening? And might we shift around, you know, different priorities? And then you can toggle some of these factors like, Hey, I said, I wanted to retire at 67. But what happens if it’s 62? Or 58? Or, you know, hey, I’d like the work that I’m doing, and I don’t really see myself going from full time did nothing for 30 years. What if I’m working part time and having an income? And these changed things significantly when you look at these calculations.

Tim Baker  13:08

Yeah, I mean, if I do say so myself, I think it’s a great tool. I think it was born out of like the misconnection between that big number in the future and what we’re doing today. And I think to your point, like being able to, like toggle those levers and pull those levers, you know, whether it’s, you know, working longer working less, you know, dialing back things, you know, down up things like I think it’s really cool to see. And to your point, yeah, we’ve had a lot of clients that have definitely, you know, we talk about, you know, living a wealthy life today and will live in a wealthy life tomorrow. Sometimes the calculus shows that they’re really focused on living a wealthy life tomorrow, in spite of today, meaning like, you know, I think it’s rare for a financial planner to say like, Hey, you’re saving too much for retirement. But I do think that that push and pull between today and tomorrow is really important. So like, let’s focus on that trip to wherever let’s focus on you know, that, you know, down payment for a real estate property or whatever that is, like the like those things, I think, have to be part of the, of the plan as well. So yeah, it’s a great question to ask. It’s just really hard to, to to answer without, you know, a lot of detail. A lot of, you know, what’s the balance sheet look like? What are the goals and, you know, go  on from there.

Tim Ulbrich  13:14

 It is.

Tim Ulbrich  14:34

If listeners want to dig deeper on this topic, first love to have you join us at the Open House. Second, we’ve covered this as a stand alone topic on the episode on the podcast before Episode 272. Tim and I talked about how much is enough and how do you determine that. We’ll link to that to the show notes. Make sure to check out that episode as well. Our second question we have as I mentioned before, probably the most common question that I get when I’m presenting is Hey, what are the pros and cons of paying off low interest debt, such as a student loan or auto loan versus investing. Furthermore, how do you think about prioritizing strategies for paying down debt, saving for retirement and saving for a house down payment? Tim, I’ll add to this before you jump in here that this is a really common question that we see, especially among, you know, those within that first 10 years of graduation, right. They’ve got a lot of things that are coming at them. I’ve got, you know, a bunch of student loans, I’m looking at buying a home, you’re telling me that I should be investing in saving for the future? I need an emergency fund. How do I begin to prioritize and weigh all these things? And, again, before you say, it depends, like, I think this is an example question where the value of planning is so important, because we got to get all those things out of our head on the paper, so we can start to plan. So what are your thoughts here?

Tim Baker  15:46

Yeah, I mean, I always look at debt as like a spectrum. I think you have, you know, good debt, which, you know, I would I would categorize as, like a mortgage. I would still put student loan debt in there, because, you know, a mortgage is a, you know, typically appreciating an asset that you can, that you’re living in, raise a family. Student loans, typically, you know, the price of doing business to become a pharmacist, you know, higher levels of of income, you know, post degree. But then as you go like, like auto loans, again, again, these are used assets that are typically depreciating. You’re typically paying higher interest than you have in the past, but it serves a function of like getting you to work. But then as you go, it might be things like, debt for furniture or other types of personal loans. And then credit card debt is typically at that, you know, other end of the spectrum of bad debt, where it’s, you know, you’re typically, this is the purchase of of wants not necessarily needs, or, you know, it’s there because of a lack of an emergency fund or kind of planning, planning for those unexpected things. So, you know, I think like, where you sit, where you draw the line between good debt and bad debt, it’s going to different be different for everybody. You know, typically, it’s, it’s the car to the right is good debt. So car, student loans, mortgages, are okay. And then everything for the left is not. Some people will put cars like a bad debt. So I think it just depends on what your again, what your goals are, what your what your aspect of debt. You know, I was asked recently by a prospective client about like, you know, hey, was watching something that Dave Ramsey said about paying off, you know, a mortgage that’s less than 3%. And he’s very, paints with a broad brush and said, like, you know, really any debt, you’re kind of a slave to the master is kind of how he describes it. And I think like, there’s a psychological thing of this, like, if you if you feel like that debt, is preventing you to be financially free, that I would treat that differently than something else, you know, like, I have no qualms about sitting on my two and a half percent mortgage for 30 years, I just don’t. So I think if we look at this, like the pros of paying off debt, versus invest in, you know, the paying off debt, it’s a guaranteed return, right? So if your debt is 6%, that’s, you know, you’re not necessarily gonna get that in the market consistently. So it’s a guaranteed return. I think it reduces financial stress. So eliminating debt can reduce stress and kind of simplify your finances. You do, I think, if you are completely debt free, I think you can you operate differently, you think you look at the world a little bit differently than if you have, you know, multiple liabilities. That’s kind of, you know, weighing on you and we see this with student loans, Tim, right. Like, you know, I feel suffocated, because I have this $200,000 in debt. The cons of paying off debt, I think, is the opportunity costs of like, what you might miss in terms of like, if you were to invest that, you know, especially if the interest rates are really low, and then just kind of just overall money, you know, less money for investments. The pros, I think of investing is potentially higher returns, although not guaranteed, compounding growth, potential tax benefits, if you’re putting in things like 401Ks and IRAs, The cons are again, market risk, there’s no guarantee. And, you know, complexity, like you know, if you’re just paying off debt, you know, a lot of people will make investing more interesting or sexier than it needs to be I look at as an as an investment as it should be super boring, but not everyone does that. A lot of people don’t do that. So that’s, that’s kind of my, there is no right or wrong answer. I kind of have my own biases.

When I’m working with a client, I’ll look at their risk tolerance. I’ll look at what their goals are. I’ll look at like, what are they saying to me? If they’re saying things like, this debt keeps me up at night, I’m gonna treat that very differently than if someone’s like, yeah, like it’s whatever. But there is a mathematical component to that as well. In terms of prioritize and financial strategies or just get the financial, like, what do we do, you know, for paying down debt versus saving, you know, I was speaking to, you know, a prospective client the other day, and they have real estate, they have some investments, they have a brokerage account, no emergency fund. So like, we’re we’re doing steps, six, seven, and eight, before we’re doing step one, really. So building an emergency fund, having a high yield savings account with, you know, those non-discretionary, you think expensives, just stowed away. Super important. That’s, that’s a foundational thing. I think from there, it’s also like the consumer debt, so like credit cards, you know, furniture debt, whatever that looks like, I think is really important, because it’s typically higher nterest that you want to get get out from underneath.

I would also put taken advantage of the employer match up there, like, you know, most of the time, I think that is really, really important to get the free money. But still see people that don’t take advantage of that. And then I think looking at higher interest debt, paying that off. So, you know, maybe that is a car, you know, we’re seeing, you know, car rates, I think you you mentioned it in YFP plus community, just what those rate rates are. Shocking, you know, they’re high. So I assume, yeah, I would I, I would pay that off before I would go into the market. So I think that that to me, and again, like the one thing that the questioner asked, you know, it’s like, what about saving for retirement, again, I kind of look at, get the match. And then I look at it as that as you are navigating these other things to me, in the back of your mind, it should be a race to 10%. Like, get the match, which may be 5%. But then you really want to get to 10% as quickly as possible, and then assess from there. And then I think, like, to me saving for a house down payment. That’s a really tough one to prioritize, Tim, because oftentimes with this one, like, like you’re, you, you rationalize it, you know, you rationalize your decision. So like, it’s a super emotional decision, once you start going down the path of looking at houses, being a Zillow warrior, actually go into houses, like those timelines get cut overnight. And I always joke, like, I was talking to a prospective client. And they were like, Yeah, I want to buy a house in the next two or three years. And I talked to them two weeks later, and they were under contract. So to me, like, if that’s important for you, I would put that to the top, you know, put that at the top of the list, you know, and prioritize that. I think what, what sometimes happens, Tim, is that we try, we try to do a lot. We try to do a little bit of a lot of things versus a lot of like one or two things. Yeah. So I think working with a planner to help you prioritize is going to be really important. And it’s hard to do. Sometimes it’s hard to do that when you’re stuck inside your own head, or even with like a spouse. So sometimes that you know that that third party objective viewpoint to help you guide guide that conversation, I think is important. But again, there’s really no right or wrong answer here. It’s just tailoring to like when I say it depends. What I mean by that is, you know, it depends on what your balance sheet are, like, what your balance sheet looks like, and what your goals are. And unfortunately, you can’t like look at a neighbor or a colleague, because like you’re going to be different. You are a unique snowflake. So you know, your your experience, your life experience, your your finances are going to be different than than everybody else’s. And I think, you know, developing a plan that navigates that is super important.

Tim Ulbrich  22:39

Yeah, Tim, the visual that comes to mind, as you’re talking and I alluded to this, when I asked the question is, you know, we so often live with all of these competing priorities that are swirling in our minds, right? Guilty as charged. And it really is a step that often is hard work. But it’s really important because we’re a third party can be so helpful for us to kind of get out of our own way and make sure we’re looking at all the factors, making sure we’re not thinking of things in a silo. But it’s like, we got to put all the puzzle pieces out, we got to get them out of the box. So we can start to figure out how they actually come together. And then to implement the plan, looking at our cash flow, looking at our goals and things to actually begin to execute on that. But we tend to go into execution mode, without really considering all the pieces and parts and how they impact one another. And this sounds easy, but it’s not right. You know, in this question, you know, we’re thinking about paying down debt, you know, and that could be more than one type of debt. We’re thinking about, hey, when might we buy a home we think about saving for retirement, when you look at the percentage of take home pay that these things will take up it is huge. These are these are big decisions. And we’re not even talking about other types of goals, right vacation, travel, what else is going on the financial plan, so I feel like there’s such an important step here of, before you start running in any one direction. Hey, let’s get on with This down on the paper. You know, you did this for Jess and I back in the day, like, let’s create a prioritized list of these. What’s the target? What’s the goal? How much do we need? What priority, how much per month? And then we start to actually create the buckets and the mechanism and the thing to actually make these come to life. And when you’re doing that, and you’re automating that, I can’t even adequately describe the feelings that come when you know that that system is in place working for you. 

Tim Baker  25:26

Yeah and I think like to go back to the first question, like, we’ve had conversations with clients that like, you know, they’re saving so much for retirement, and they’re like, we can actually do a little bit less than get into the house sooner. Right. So like, like, if you think about it, like, my, my Pop Pop back in the day, like he had a pension, there was no such thing as 401k is like, all of these other things that have like, like, made financial, you know, even my parents, like, it’s very different. Now, you go into the workforce, and you have 30,000 things that are like, like, vying for your attention and your your dollars. And it’s just different than what it was before. And now, like the onus, especially on retirement is up to you versus like, your employer. But it’s also like, a lot of the advice that that you’re getting is from, like, the old generation of like, hey, buy a house, make sure you’re saving for it, and those are all good things. But the world is different now. And I’m not saying that, like, that’s, that’s bad, that’s bad advice. But like, you got to kind of have to, like, you know, walk to your own tune, so to speak. And I think like, a lot of people get get anxiety because they’re like, I’m not like, I’m not doing enough here. I’m not doing enough here. And, you know, I think like, if you’re doing a plan, you’re doing enough, right.

And I think part of the part of the great thing about plan is that you are slowing down in the day to day of like busy living and objectively looking at your situation and reflecting, self reflecting or forcing to reflect of like, Hey, are we on the track that we’re supposed to be on. And also to like, celebrate the wins, like, you know, when we start with a client, you know, the the first two meetings that we go through is what we call Get Organized, where we’re building out a nice clean balance sheet of all the assets that we own, minus all the liabilities that we owe. That’s our first data points. Think of that as like the before picture. And then the second meeting is what we call Script Your Plan is all about, okay, now that we know where we’re at, where are we going, so let’s talk about you want to buy a house, you want to have a family, you want to be able to retire at this age, you want to be able to, you know, build your real estate empire, you want to be able to do XY and Z. And once we have those two foundational thing in place, the answer “it depends,” then transforms to this is what I think you should do because I know what your balance sheet looks like, I know what your goals are. And this is the you know, the the objective advice that we think is in your best interest. So like, that’s going to be different for everyone. And I think like that, you know, tracking that from data point one to three, you know, two years, three years in the future, we start to see quantifiably the benefit, we think, you know, net worth is the best measure of that, the benefit from a net worth perspective, but then also the qualitative benefits of like, wow, like, I took that trip, I am spending more time with my family, like we had a family sooner than I thought, we bought the house. You know, I thought it was gonna take us five years, we did it live in less time. So to me, those are the benefits of, of, again, working on a plan, working with a planner to help prioritize all these things, right?

Because, you know, we talked about this in the in the tax world, we feel that working with one of our CFPs and a CPA side by side and stacking years of intentional financial planning and intentional tax planning will get you to where you need to, you know, be quicker. But you know, I was working, I was working, talking to one of our planning clients that’s considering tax, and they have a tax person, but they’re just you know, and it’s a question of filing separately and filing jointly. They’re just looking at it from the perspective of tax. They’re not thinking about how that affects how the filing status affects the student loan payment. So to me, you can’t look at these things in a vacuum. They they’re all interconnected. And I think as you go, that becomes, you know, more true and more obvious. So, again, I’m biased though, right?

Tim Ulbrich  29:33

It’s great stuff. And that’s why I’m glad you brought up the quantitative, qualitative stuff because yes, it translates into actual dollars and cents net worth is the indicator that we’re, you know, looking at most assets, what you own minus liabilities what you owe, but it’s also is the qualitative stuff, are we achieving that living a rich life and also as I alluded to, just the mental clarity and the peace of mind that comes from like, I know that I’ve thought about these or I know that me and my partner or spouse I thought about these together. And we have a plan like targeted dollar amount to that. But that really is incredible. And for folks that want to learn more about our one-on-one financial planning service, you can go to YFPplanning.com. Let’s have a conversation with you to learn more about that service, learn more about what you have going on in your own individual plan and see whether or not that service is a good fit again, YFPplanning.com. From there, you can click on the link to book a free discovery call. Alright, Tim, question number three. If PSLF, Public Service Loan Forgiveness, is not an option for me, what should I do with $200,000 of student loans? How do I wait paying them off versus pursuing 20 to 25 years of forgiveness, which would then result in what we call what others call the tax bomb? So what are your thoughts here?

Tim Baker  30:49

Yeah, and again, forgive the continued commercial, Tim, but like, I think when you’re dealing with six figures worth of debt $200,000, I do think some type of an analysis is really important, especially with like, the moving goal posts, that are the student loan repayment plans, and then the strategies that are out there. So I think, you know, this is a math equation that comes from the analysis, but I think you have to also overlay how you feel about the debt, right? So again, if you’re like, like, I need to get through this, like, ASAP, like, it’s a weight on me versus  like, it is what it is, I think that with the math equation is going to color how like, I would advise you as your planner. So I would say back in the day, you know, when we would look at a potentially non PSLF, you know, strategy. So, just to remind everyone PSLF, you know, was implemented in 2007. And the so that means that, you know, the first the first time someone was able to be forgiven was 2017. So you had to, you had to work, you had your loans had to be federal, you had to be in the right type of a repayment plan, you had to work for a non-profits 501C3, the government. You paid, you know, 10 years worth of payments didn’t have to be consecutive, and then you were forgiven tax free. You can, you’re eligible for forgiveness, you’re still eligible forgiveness outside of PSLF, we call it non PSLF. The, it’s a little bit different, you still have to have the right loans and the right plan, it doesn’t matter who you work for. So you can work for a for-profit. But instead of paying it for 10 years, you are paying it for 20 or 25 years of their graduate loans. And then that forgiveness amount is taxable in the year forgiveness, whereas PSLF, it’s a tax free event. So in before, you know, the new, the new plan, the save plan, typically the calculus was if your debt to income ratio was higher than two to one. So meaning I made 100,000 and I had $300,000 in debt, my debt to income ratio was three to one in that case, then a non-PSLF strategy was on the table. Because by the time we looked at $300,000, and a standard or even a refi, by the time we looked at that compared to a an income driven plan, plus, you know, a couple $100, or whatever that was invested for a tax bomb, what you paid per month, and what you paid in total was less than what you would pay in standard.

Now with the save plan and the payments a little bit different that it’s it’s it’s changed a little bit. So I would say that, you know, and the other thing that’s changed, too, Tim, is that, you know, we’re, if if we were looking at non-PSLF, we were also looking at like, typically a refi. So like if we, if our rates were 6% Wait it, you know, you might be able to go out. And for the same 10 year, find a 4.5% or 5%. So you’d get a little bit of a better rate. That’s changed too, right. So now what we’re having a way is a non peel PSLF strategy, versus staying in the federal system with potentially a better interest rate, but meet just maybe keeping the standard, you know, the standard plan. So if you have $200,000 in debt, the standard plan is going to be $2,171 for 10 years. So I think the play here is potentially looking at a refi which I don’t know if you’re necessarily going to be you know, I would look at a 10 year if you can go a little bit more aggressive seven year, five year. But your your, you know, your your payments going to go up accordingly. So, again, the goalposts have changed a little bit here. You know, I would say that, you know, I would say that probably a non-PSLF strategy here if I’m assuming you’re making $125, $130, is probably not the way to go. So probably something in the standard, maybe even being more aggressive in the standard or, again, looking at refis if rates come down, you know. I’m not sure what the 10 year if you do an apples to apples, but there are some benefit, there are still benefits to staying in the federal that I wouldn’t want there to be a pretty, pretty significant interest rate decrease for me to move off into a private loan. And that’s irreversible. So before Tammy, we would just say, Hey, this is kind of the rules of thumb, this is the way to look at it. But it’s a lot different because of the new save plan, the interest rates, etc. You know, so that’s basically where we’re at today.

Tim Ulbrich  35:35

Yeah, I think as you pointed out, the income of this individual is a really important piece of information we don’t have, right because if they’re making $180k, versus they’re making $95k, that’s going to impact that debt to income ratio. And to your point with the new save plan, that ratio, in effect has gotten more favorable. What I mean by that, is because of the change in the plan, the debt to income threshold could potentially be lower and it might make sense to pursue a non PSLF pathway. And, you know, let’s zoom back out, right? We’ve been kind of preaching on not not getting into the silos have to decisions, when you’re talking about hey, do we go more aggressive? Do we not that gets back to conversations about cash flow? What does the budget actually support? What other goals are in mind? You know, are we someone who graduated in their mid to late 20s? Or is this someone that pharmacy’s a second career, and they’re behind on investing in retirement – all of those things, just a few examples are going to impact, right, what decision we make with the student loans and how it ties into other decisions that are happening in the financial plan. So, Tim, great stuff.

These are just a few of the types of questions and conversations that we are seeing inside of our new online community called YFP Plus if you’re not already familiar with YFP Plus, we’d love to have you check out that community. Inside you’ll find exclusive on demand courses, We’ve got weekly live events, we have monthly themes and challenges. So for example, this past month in February, we were talking all about preparing for Uncle Sam and taxes bringing in Sean our CPA into the community. For the month of March, it’s all about FIRE: Financial Independence, Retire Early. We’ve got several events lined up throughout the month, the space to ask questions of our financial planners and our tax professionals and to be in a community of other like minded individuals. It’s really an incredible community. We hope you’ll check it out and use our 30 day free trial to determine whether or not it’s a good long term fit for you. You can do that by going to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/membership to get more information on YFP Plus. Again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/membership. Thanks so much for joining us. We’ll see you next week. Take care. 

Tim Ulbrich  37:37

[DISCLAIMER]

As we conclude this week’s podcast and important reminder that the content on this show is provided you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 347: Redefining Retirement with David Zgarrick, Ph.D. (YFP Classic)


Dr. David Zgarrick, retired professor, redefines retirement after 30+ years in academia and shares insights on embracing a fulfilling post-pharmacy life.

Episode Summary

This week on the YFP Podcast, we revisit a classic. On episode #291, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, welcomed Dr. David Zgarrick, a Professor Emeritus of Northeastern University, to the show to discuss redefining retirement. Some highlights from the episode include Dr. Zgarrick sharing his views on his next phase in life, after 30+ years in academia, as a preferment phase of his career. He shares how and why he started planning for his financial future early on in his life and career and hands down advice for new pharmacy graduates facing competing financial priorities. Throughout the discussion, listeners will hear Dr. Zgarrick speak on standout moments from his pharmacy career, the impact his financial choices have had on that journey, and ultimately his decision to enter this preferment stage of his career. He shares excitement for retirement and this next phase of his life, what he means by a preferment phase, and how retirement can be an opportunity to experience a rich, fulfilling life outside of pharmacy without the guilt of competing responsibilities. Listen for helpful advice Dr. Zgarrick took from his financial advisor regarding his first year of retirement and how factoring in a cross-country move played a role in his retirement and financial plan.

About Today’s Guest

David P. Zgarrick, Ph.D., is a Professor Emeritus in the School of Pharmacy and Pharmaceutical Sciences at Northeastern University. His prior positions include Associate Dean of Faculty at Northeastern’s Bouvé College of Health Sciences, Acting Dean of Northeastern’s School of Pharmacy and Pharmaceutical Sciences, Chair of the Northeastern’s Department of Pharmacy and Health Systems Sciences; John R. Ellis Distinguished Chair of Pharmacy Practice at Drake University College of Pharmacy and Health Sciences; and Vice-chair of Pharmacy Practice at Midwestern University Chicago College of Pharmacy. He is a licensed pharmacist, receiving a BS in Pharmacy from the University of Wisconsin – Madison and a MS and Ph.D. in Pharmaceutical Administration from The Ohio State University. Dr. Zgarrick taught pharmacy practice management and entrepreneurship in the health sciences. His scholarly interests include pharmacy workforce research, pharmacy management and operations, pharmacy education, and development of post-graduate programs. He has published over 150 peer-reviewed manuscripts and abstracts, is co-editor of the textbook Pharmacy Management: Essentials for All Practice Settings (5th Ed), and authored the book Getting Started as a Pharmacy Faculty Member. He was editor-in-chief of the Journal of Pharmacy Teaching, Executive Associate Editor of Currents in Pharmacy Teaching and Learning, and an editorial board member of Research in Social and Administrative Pharmacy. Dr. Zgarrick is active in many professional organizations, including the American Pharmacists Association (APhA) and the American Association of Colleges of Pharmacy (AACP). He served on AACP’s Board of Directors for 12 years, including as Treasurer from 2016 – 2022. Dr. Zgarrick also serves on the Board of Visitors for the University of Wisconsin School of Pharmacy, the Board of Grants for the American Foundation for Pharmaceutical Education, and is a Fellow of the American Pharmacists Association.

Key Points from the Episode

  • Why David views the next phase of life after 30+ years in academia, not as a retirement, but rather, as a preferment phase of his career.
  • How and why he started planning financially early in his career to put himself in a position of having choice.
  • Advice he has for new grads that are facing the financial headwind of many competing priorities including student loans, saving for the future, and buying a home.

Episode Highlights

“I think when one thinks about getting to this stage in a career, I mean, there’s been so much that’s been rewarding and interesting about the work that I do. But like anyone, none of our career paths or jobs are perfect. They all come with sometimes things that we would just assume not be doing. Or the longer we’ve been doing something, we get to know ourselves pretty well.”  – David Zgarrick, Ph.D.

“Money is a means to an end. It is not an end in and of itself. The same as our career. We have to think of our career path as a means to an end. Not the end in and itself.” – David Zgarrick, Ph.D.

“I remember one time you posted on one of your blogs or something, what’s the most fun thing one can do when you’ve got some extra money? And I think I remember my comment to that post was: save it. And to some people that might not seem the most exciting thing in the world. But when I can take that money and put it in the bank, that tells me that I’m going to have that for – I’m going to be able to make decisions in a future based on having made that decision now to save that money. And it’s going to give me options that I know other people might not have if they didn’t save that money.” – David Zgarrick, Ph.D.

“We have money and we manage our money because we want to be able to live a life that’s meaningful to us. And however that is, I’m not here to judge how one spends their money or what one does with their money. So long as you’ve got the money to be able to do it, that’s our choices. It’s your choices to be able to do that how you wish.” – David Zgarrick, Ph.D.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom.

This week, I had the pleasure of welcoming Dr. David Zgarrick, a professor emeritus of Northeastern University College of Pharmacy. Some of my favorite moments from the show including hearing Dave share why he views the next phase of life after 30-plus years in Academia not as retirement but rather as a preferment phase of his career. How and why he started planning financially early in his career to put himself in a position of having choice? And advice he has for new grads that are facing the financial headwind of many competing financial priorities, including student loan debt, buying a home and saving for the future. 

Now, before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP planning does and working one-on-one with more than 280 households in 40-plus states. YFP planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. 

Whether or not YFP planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s jump on my interview with professor emeritus Dr. Dave Zgarrick. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:29] TU: Dave, welcome to the show.

[00:01:30] Dr. DZ: Thank you. Thank you. It’s great to be here, Tim.

[00:01:33] TU: Well, I’m really excited to have you on to dig into your professional journey and the impact that finances has had throughout your journey so that you could retire or perhaps better said, as we’ll talk about, take a half-time break at the age of 57. And you and I have known each other for several years through the academic circles. And when I saw your post on LinkedIn about entering this next phase, I knew that your story would have such a great impact on our community. So, thanks so much for coming on the show.

[00:02:00] Dr. DZ: Thank you. Thank you so much for having me. I’m really great to be here. And it’s great to think about half time. It was interesting, I’m a Green Bay Packers Fan. You’re a Buffalo Bills fan. Just thinking about half time. We’re about halfway through the NFL season. It’s time to make some adjustments. And I think both the Packers and Bills will have some adjustments to make. And so, we can talk about how we make financial adjustments as well.

[00:02:22] TU: I love that. I love that. Let’s start with your pharmacy career. When did that Journey begin and what drew you into the profession to begin with? 

[00:02:31] Dr. DZ: I’m from an interesting community. I’m from Marshfield, Wisconsin, which is a relatively small community in Central Wisconsin. But it’s a very unique community and that Marshfield has a very large medical center. It’s the Marshfield Clinic. It has now the Marshall Medical Center. 

I grew up with health and healthcare even though no one in my family was a healthcare professional. My father was an administrator for a dairy corporation. My mother is an educator. She taught special education. I was not brought up in a healthcare background. But I had lots of friends and knew lots of people that were in the healthcare space. 

And as I was going through high school, I was thinking about health and healthcare a lot and thinking about wanting to go down that pathway. I was reasonably good at all the things they tell you you’re supposed to be good at in high school, math and science, and communications and all those things. 

I had honestly probably was thinking first about medicine at the time. I was going to go to medical school. I guess, in some ways I was very fortunate. I went to a career day seminar and one of the speakers that came to that career day seminar was someone from the University of Wisconsin School of Pharmacy. And talked a little bit about pharmacy and what pharmacists did and so forth. And pharmacy hit a good spot. 

And again, I’ll give my parents credit. They were very pragmatic with me when it came to where are you going to go to college? And what are you going to major in college? That kind of stuff. And they were said, “You know, you can go to college anywhere you want. And you can major in anything you want so long as you can support yourself when you’re done.” 

And to that end, pharmacy seemed it was a great at the time. Keep in mind. It was a five-year BS degree at the time, which was a great fit. Because in some ways I’m thinking, “Okay, I’m going to learn all these things that are going to help me if I go to medical school. Become a physician. I’m going to learn a lot about drugs, and a lot about health and health care and so forth.” Worst case scenario, if I don’t get medical school, I could be a pharmacist and I’ll be able to support myself. 

I’ll say two things happened along the way. One, I recognized that being a physician wasn’t all it was cracked up to be. And especially the pathway towards becoming a physician. It’s not just medical school, of course. It’s residency and training and everything that that life brings. And then I also learned that there’s so much more to pharmacy than I had envisioned there was. Probably many people, when you start down this path. Growing up in Central Wisconsin, honestly, my only connection with pharmacy was with community pharmacy. 

I saw people, primarily men, wearing white coats working behind counters and seeing them take big bottles of pills and put them into little bottles of pills. And didn’t think that much more of it. Obviously, as I learned so much more of about not only what the role of pharmacy was at that time but what we were seeing it begin to evolve to. Towards not just dispensing medications, of course, but really using our knowledge and expertise to help maximize the benefits from medication therapy.

I was fortunate. I had some really good experiences along the way. I hooked up with folks that were doing research in a variety of different ways. I spent one summer doing medical research working in a lab. And honestly said to myself, “That’s not what I wanted to do.” 

But I spent more time doing research with social administrative scientists and learning about the kinds of questions that they asked. My parents will tell you I am one of those people that always ask questions. I was one of those always kids that always asked, “Why? Why? Why?” 

And as you can imagine, parents, you being a parent yourself, you’re probably – at a certain point, you just want to tell your kids go figure it out yourself. Because, honestly, that’s what we do as researchers. We ask questions and we have the tools to be able to learn how to figure it out ourselves. 

Now, my questions I was very interested in asking were honestly about pharmacists themselves. The work they do. How they’re rewarded for that? What their ambitions are? Where they see themselves going with their careers? As a pharmacy workforce researcher, my interest is very much in who pharmacists are and what they want to do with that pathway. 

And so, I got my pharmacy degree from Wisconsin. I went and worked as a community pharmacist for several years. Worked for a company that’s called Shopko. Unfortunately, Shopko is no longer with us. But many of us probably remember what Shopko was. And for a number of years, they were a great place to work with because I really used my knowledge as a pharmacist and as a pharmacy manager working for Shopko. 

But then went back to – went to Ohio State for graduate school. That was a good place to be able to go to be able to learn the research tools that I needed to have to be able to do the research that I do is. As well as to get more experience with teaching and educating. 

I had gotten some experiences as a teaching assistant, as an undergraduate student at Wisconsin already. But then at Ohio State, I got even more experience and learned what it was like to be in part of a classroom of 100 students and have to be prepared and have to help students understand how does their knowledge of this particular topic fit into a bigger picture of all of the things that we expect them to know as a pharmacist? 

As I finished up my graduate work, I had options. I could go work for the pharmaceutical industry. I could go work with a managed care organization. I could work with wholesalers like Cardinal, or McKesson, or Bergen or something like that. There were lots of options. 

Ultimately, I chose the academic path because I really enjoyed that ability to not just continue to do research but to connect with students and to really – it felt that I could have the biggest impact in my profession. And ultimately, the biggest impact on patients by continuing to train and help educate the next future generations of people that are going to go into pharmacy.

[00:09:00] TU: I love that, Dave. And you would ultimately spend 30-plus years across three different institutions in that area of work and I know have had an impact on so many other colleagues that you’ve crossed path with, obviously, the thousands probably of students that you worked with over the years. 

[00:09:17] Dr. DZ: It’s interesting. At this point of one’s career when – yeah, one naturally does kind of look back at those types of things. And I started adding up the numbers between the institutions I’ve taught. And I’ve been the professor of probably close to 5,000 students over the years. I’m editor of a textbook and I work with several others on that book as well that I know is used in most colleges of pharmacy in the United States. And including not many colleges of pharmacy across the world. And so, it’s kind of cool to think about how one has an impact not necessarily even just directly like we are used to with our patients. But that indirect impact that the work that we do can be used by so many people. 

[00:10:01] TU: One of the reasons I was so excited for this interview, Dave, is that I think there’s often a perception around retirement that folks might be limping towards that line. Or begrudgingly working late in their career. Or there’s a lot of energy around early retirement. But often, I think that’s with the context of that someone may not necessarily be enjoying the work that they’re doing. 

And what’s really interesting about your story is the great career you have had. The fulfillment and joy you had in your work. The impact you had on many others. But also, this excitement around the next phase of life. And to me, that is what – when we talk about preferred retirement, when we talk about what retirement may look like and the vision of like that, that to me is the success I know that I’m yearning for, is to have an option and choice, of course. But also, to look back and feel like, “Wow! I love the time that I had and the impact and the opportunities I had.” 

And you shared something really interesting on LinkedIn. You said that, “While I may have concluded the pharmacy educator phase of my career, I certainly don’t think of myself as being done.” And to borrow a phrase from Lucinda Main, someone we both know. You said you’re entering the preferment phase of your career. Fortunate to have the luxury of choosing what you’d like to do. Who I’d like to do it with? And taking the time to figure it all out. I love that, the preferment phase. Talk to us more about what that means to you.

[00:11:31] Dr. DZ: Thank you so much, because I feel so fortunate to be able to be at this phase of my career. And I want to share my wife, Michelle, who’s also a pharmacist who I met in graduate school at Ohio State. She has also started at her preferment phase as well. She was a pharmacist. Worked in the hospitals and outpatient oncology settings for many years. And has decided to start her preferment stage at this point with us. 

But, no. I think when one thinks about getting to this stage in a career, I mean, there’s been so much that’s been rewarding and interesting about the work that I do. But like anyone, none of our career paths or jobs are perfect. They all come with sometimes things that we would just assume not be doing. Or the longer we’ve been doing something, we get to know ourselves pretty well. 

And I say to myself, “Well, these are things that I really like that I’m really interested in.” And then there’s other parts of my job that I’m doing that, “Well, I’m not so interested in those things.” And I’m just doing them because at a certain point you kind of feel you have to. And I guess this is, again, a good position to be able to be in. 

When one thinks about preferment, I mean, yes, I stepped off in academia what we call the tenure track. I was a tenured full professor, which in many respects is the ideal position. It’s the golden ring that many people go towards. This idea that you have a lifetime contract. And I was very fortunate to have a lifetime contract at a leading university and was well-compensated for what I did. I’m very fortunate to have been in that position. 

That said, if you’re staying in that position, you’re going to keep doing all of those things essentially for the rest of your career. And I just kind of said to myself, “Maybe not.” Maybe there are other things I’d like to do. Again, there’s things I like doing. There’s things that I don’t like doing. And then there’s this whole outside of my job life, the things that make me, so to speak, that I kind of wanted to think I’d like to be able to do them without feeling guilty that I should be doing something else. And so, no, I decided that this was a good point in my life to be able to make this type of change. 

[00:14:01] TU: Mm-hmm. Yeah, and I think – No pressure, Dave. But I think you and maybe Lucinda should work on a book on the preferment phase. Because I think – and we try to find this balance. But we focus so heavily on the dollars and cents, right? Really important. We got to have enough to cover our needs and the goals we have. Whatever those may be. But we tend to overlook both in retirement as well as throughout our careers. What does it mean to live a rich life? Not just dollars and cents. But at the end of the day, money is a tool, right? 

[00:14:34] Dr. DZ: Oh, exactly. Exactly. I couldn’t agree with you more. Money is a means to an end. It is not an end in and of itself. The same as our career. We have to think of our career path as a means to an end. Not the end in and itself. 

Again, when I stepped back and thought about that, I think about my family. And it was difficult sometimes especially during the pandemic. I mean, my family was back in the midwest, in Wisconsin, in Chicago and so forth. And there was a long time where we literally couldn’t travel to go see them. My wife’s family was in Ohio. The same thing. My wife was working at a hospital and they’ve literally told her, “Well, if you leave the state of Massachusetts to go visit your family, you have to quarantine for two weeks before you come back to work. And that, just for a long time, wasn’t viable for either of us. 

We started thinking about our families. We started thinking about the things we enjoy doing. I mean, I enjoy skiing. I enjoy getting out on my bike and going on rides and that kind of stuff. And some of the mental type things that we all like doing and so forth. The things that honestly make us us. 

I look to this point of life that we’ve entered now where it’s giving us more space and time to be able to do that and not feel like, “Oh, I’ve got to do this job aspect of my job or that aspect of my job.” I mean, we’ve figured out ways to be able to manage that.

[00:16:09] TU: One thing I mentioned to you before we recorded is I’m reading right now a book called Retirement Stepping Stones by Tony Hixson. We’ll link to that in the show notes. And this was recommended to me by a shared colleague that really John [inaudible 00:16:23] said, “Hey, Tim you got to read this book,” to really have perspective on what he and I were talking about at the time, which is more this concept of life planning. Again, need the dollars and cents. But also, what are the goals? What’s the vision we have to live life well? 

And Tony Hickson, in this book, talks about retirement not as a finish line but how we need to be thinking about as a half time. And I love that. Because what do we do at halftime, right? You already kind of mentioned it when our Bills and Packers played. You adjust. You adjust and you have a plan. 

Yes, it’s been informed a little bit by what’s been happening. But it’s a time to reset, to look ahead and to make sure we have a plan. We don’t just go out into the third quarter and hope it’s going to work out, right? 

My question for you is it’s clear to me, Dave, when I hear you talk talking about investment of more time with family, with the outdoors, and skiing and traveling. That there’s these other goals. But there’s been thought and intention behind this transition. And talk us through that a little bit more and how you and your wife got to this decision point and ultimately painted the picture of what this vision would look like.

[00:17:28] Dr. DZ: Yeah, I think for many of us – I mean, in some ways, it’s been a conversation we’ve thought about for a long time. I mean, we knew from this point that we started working that someday we were going to retire. We weren’t just going to stay chained to our desks, or to our hospitals, or universities forever and ever. 

We knew that that day was going to come. We didn’t necessarily know when that was going to be. But we started saving and thinking accordingly for that knowing that it would come. And so, there was an aspect of having a financial plan that we started to put in place. 

Moving forward, I’ll say, like many people, we did get to the pandemic and kind of said to ourselves, “As our jobs were changing and our careers were changing, are these changes we wanted to make –” I mean, in some ways we made them because we had to. We all adjusted and so forth. But did we want to continue down this pathway? And I think we put some thought and energy into this. 

And then now, I’m going to say we also sat down with a financial advisor. And actually, I’m going to mention just a little bit thinking about finances. Because, of course, there is a financial aspect to be able to make these decisions. Like I said, my wife and I had started saving. And we are savers. That’s part of our culture. 

I remember one time you posted on one of your blogs or something, what’s the most fun thing one can do when you’ve got some extra money? And I think I remember my comment to that post was save it. And to some people that might not seem the most exciting thing in the world. But when I can take that money and put it in the bank, that tells me that I’m going to have that for – I’m going to be able to make decisions in a future based on having made that decision now to save that money. And it’s going to give me options that I know other people might not have if they didn’t save that money. 

Like I said, we were pretty good savers. That said, we didn’t have – let’s say, we didn’t have a sense of when halftime was or how we were actually going to go about making that decision. And so, in some ways I was really fortunate that a financial planner, so to speak, somewhat fell into my lab. 

My parents had set up a life insurance policy for me when I was born. Like, many families do with their kids. And it was a whole life policy that had a relatively small cash value. But let’s just say a number of years later somebody from that company reached out to me and said, “Have you thought about your retirement and retirement planning?” And for years I just kind of put them off thinking, “Oh, you’re just somebody trying to sell me more insurance or something like that.” And didn’t pay much attention to them. 

But then, ultimately, we just kind of – I’ll give him credit for his persistence. But every year, he came back and touched base. How’s things going and all that kind of stuff? And then ultimately kind of said – it kind of hit me that, “Yeah, I could really benefit the perspective from somebody like this.” 

Because like I said, I’ve done – I’m a pretty informed investor so to speak. I’ve done a pretty good job of saving and thinking about where my money was going to go, and making our money work the best for us and all that kind of stuff. But that still doesn’t give us necessarily a sense of when can you say it’s half time? And when can you make that decision? 

Tom, our financial advisor, really helped us with that thought process. And I’ll say I remember this very well because it was January 2021. We’d all been living through the pandemic for the better part of that year. And he just kind of sat down with us and said, “Well, okay, given what you’ve saved to this point, if you guys decided today if you wanted to not continue to do the jobs you’re doing right now and start living off of your savings based on the lifestyle that you have, of course. The spending patterns that you have and everything. He told us, essentially, you could live within – you could live to be 95 and you have a 95% chance of not running out of money. And we kind of thought to ourselves, “Wow! That’s a really good thing to hear.” 

And just having that conversation really kind of opened up our eyes to, “Well, what could we do? What are the things?” Not so much the things that we felt like we had to do, but what do we want to do? Where could we go from here? And I think that’s where we really started saying, “Okay, this is – we’re going to start moving down this path.” 

I mean, I didn’t – needless to say, didn’t immediately go to my boss and say I’m leaving. We had a very good conversation about how this was going to look. And honestly, it was more than a year and a half after I had that conversation. I didn’t officially retire from Northeastern until this past August. We had that conversation. My wife had that conversation with her folks at our hospital. And then we started planning for what our next phase of our life is going to be. 

We started thinking where do we want to be? Do we want to stay in the Northeast? Or do we want to start thinking about other parts of the country that we might want to live in and so forth? We landed on Denver is where we decided we wanted to be. We started going through the work of preparing to sell our places in the Northeast and find a place to live in Colorado. 

And I’m going to add real estate to that mix of your financial picture that you go through in making these decisions about what your total financial picture is. Because we’ve always thought of our homes not just as a place to live but as an investment that we are going to buy and hopefully sell for more than we paid for them at some point. 

But we went ahead and started making those decisions and putting that into motion. And as of last March, or this past March, we made the move from Boston to Denver. nd I’ve been very happy that we made that move. It’s worked out very well for us.

[00:23:59] TU: Let me ask for, I suspect, some pre-retirees that are listening thinking, “Ugh! Dave, I love the story and the journey.” Maybe they even look at their numbers and say, “I think it’s there.” But then they are living the reality of 8%,9% inflation, market volatility. There’s so much discussion out there of when you retire and what the market’s doing can have a long-term impact on returns and how you mitigate that risk around retirement. Talk us through – for you, obviously, we can plan scenarios. I don’t know if any of us were planning for this type of inflation volatility.

[00:24:35] Dr. DZ: Well, that’s a really good point. And believe me, I’ve had some thoughts about what we’ve gone through and in terms of the timing. I mean, when I think about even what the environment was back in early 2021 where in some ways, yeah, the stock market was starting to come back pretty strong at that time. Inflation was still pretty low. Interest rates were really low. 

One of the things – Needless to say, we go into an environment now. One of the things my financial advisor advised us of. And I can’t begin to tell you what a good piece of advice this was, was to be reasonably liquid going into what essentially will be your first year of – I’ll keep using the word preferment because I’m just not convinced that I’m retired. 

But he said, “Basically, you want to have a year’s worth of spending money, liquids, such that you don’t have to sell stocks in order to be able to have money to live on essentially.” 

And I’ll say this, it was actually relatively easy for us to be able to do that not just with some of our financial instruments that we had been using. We used them for a variety of instruments. I mean, from equity, to bonds and other types of things that everyone else uses. But again, this was the aspect of buying and selling real estate. We owned two properties outright in Massachusetts – one in Massachusetts. One in Maine. And when we sold those, we were able to purchase a home in Denver, as well as have a little bit of cash on hand. 

And having that cash on hand has made things a lot easier. Now, no one likes 8%, 9% inflation of course. And it’s certainly taken a little bit of a bite out of that cash at hand. But it’s also saved us from having to go and sell stocks at a time where stocks have taken like in the past year – What? A 20% dive. 

The one thing, thinking about stocks – I mean, I have confidence that the markets will come back. I’ve seen markets go down before and they’ve always come back. And looking at our economy and the things that underpin it, the market will come back. I don’t know exactly when and how it will. If I knew that, I probably wouldn’t be doing the preferment thing. I’d be making a lot more money as a financial advisor. 

But anyway – but I had that confidence that it will. And with that confidence I know that essentially the way we have things structured, this combination of different assets that we’re utilizing to be able to make these decisions. It’s not just one type of asset class that you look at. It’s not just your 401k, for example. There’s a variety of different ways that we can get to what we’re doing. 

And you know what? Another thing, just to get to think about this preferment thing, too. I mean, preferment does not mean not working or no income. It’s likely going to mean different types of things. I mean, I’ll say, as I’ve moved into this phase, I’m doing what most of us would call consulting work. I’m working with a couple of different universities right now. I want to add some teaching stuff. I want to add some more administrative stuff. Helping them deal with some issues that they’re dealing with and so forth. 

And, again, just utilizing the expertise that I’ve developed over the years to be able to do some things. I mean, it’s bringing in a small amount of income. Definitely not as much as I was making when I was working full-time. But that’s okay. I don’t need as much as I was working full-time. 

My wife’s in the same position. I mean, she is a pharmacist. She could go back and work as a pharmacist. I mean, especially right now, there’s lots of demand. She could. I don’t actually know if that’s really what she wants to do. She’s been telling me that her next job may be working at a Trader Joe’s. And for her, that, again, this could be the perfect thing for her.

[00:29:02] TU: Store discount. Bonus. Right? 

[00:29:03] Dr. DZ: Exactly. Exactly. Believe me, that comes in handy. But again, that’s the sense of my wife and I were both very money pharmacists. We were well-compensated people. We were not hurting for income. But I just took a step back and said, “I don’t need or even want to live my life where I have to depend on having that level of income for the rest of my life. I just looked at it and said, “I can do the things I want to do and live a very good life on not having that level of income.” 

[00:29:44] TU: Yeah. And that takes me – Dave, I’ve been thinking as you’re talking, you’ve said several things that have caught my attention. Your somewhat inherent behavior around saving. Really, this mindset around, “If I had an option to spend extra money, I’d save it because I could think about the growth and delay gratification into the future.” And those are a sneak peek into a mindset around how we think about and how we handle our money. 

And it feels like, as you’re talking, that this is something that has been ingrained in you for a long time either through personal interest, research, family experience, whatever may be the case.

[00:30:20] Dr. DZ: We were talking a little bit about this before we came online. I mean, it’s almost fair to say I’ve been thinking about this essentially from the time I was born. Because I was born into a family of savers essentially. I like to use the example of my folks – again, like I said, my father was an accountant who went to work in the dairy industry in Wisconsin. And my mother was a teacher. Between the two of them, they had a decent middle-class income, of course, and everything. But again, always saved. Part of it was to be able to save to send myself and my two brothers to college, which again I cannot begin to tell you how fortunate I was to be able to have parents who had saved for our college education and then gave us that ability to be able to start our lives without the debt that I know that many of our students have today as they’re getting that education. That, again, I know that I was so fortunate. And I’m very thankful to my parents for that.

But even more than that, it created a mindset in me that I saw what they did to be able to not only to provide a college education for me and my brothers, but to create the life for themselves as well. And my dad also retired at the age of 57. And now, – And again, retirement for him wasn’t retirement. It was. And I’ll still say is. Because my dad’s 82-years-old and is still doing this. It’s very much preferment. 

My dad was – Like I said, he’s an account who had always specialized in tax. And while he was working in the dairy industry, he started doing people’s taxes during tax season. And then when he decided he didn’t want to work in the dairy industry anymore, he just said, “Well, what am I going to do?” He just essentially start – his side gig has been doing taxes. And he still has about 200 clients to this day, including myself. 

[00:32:32] TU: In his 80s, right? 

[00:32:32] Dr. DZ: In his 80s. It is that – I’ll say for this. It’s that great mental thing for him. It keeps him very engaged. A matter of fact, every year, this time of year actually, he goes back to tax school. It’s like a one-week seminar that he goes and learns about like, “Okay, what are all the new tax codes?” and all the new things that he needs to be able to work with people as a tax advisor on and all that kind of stuff. 

And so, every year he goes to just that. And every year he shares it with me and tells me what I should be doing and how I should be preparing myself financially and that kind of stuff. But again, I just give so much credit to my parents because they had instilled in me mindsets about the value of saving and about just think about your finances really is just another one of our tools in our toolbox so to speak. It’s not an end of in itself. It’s a means to an end. 

We have money and we manage our money because we want to be able to live a life that’s meaningful to us. And however that is, I’m not here to judge how one spends their money or what one does with their money. So long as you’ve got the money to be able to do it, that’s our choices. It’s your choices to be able to do that how you wish. But it’s just having those tools and having that mindset to be able to make those decisions has been a really great thing. 

I remember probably likely somebody we both know, Karen [inaudible 00:34:13]. I went to graduate school with Karen back at Ohio State. She introduced me back, and I want to say this was probably 1990, 1991, to this little financial tool called Quicken. 

And I have to think back. Back in 1990, ’91, I don’t know if you remember the Macintosh computers that were literally like these cubes. And so, I got one of the first versions of Quicken for Mac that was – it started – And honestly, it was this way of tracking your finances. Tracking how you use your money. Doing the checkbook thing but doing it on the register on Quicken and everything. And then the fact that it keeps track of everything. 

I mean, I’m pretty proud to say now, I – what is it now? 30 some years later, I have – I still use Quicken to this day. And I have a record of my financial transactions that goes back over 30 years. And that’s been valuable to me. I mean, I can’t say that I go back and look at every transaction from 1992. But it does tell me when – let’s say if my financial advisor wanted to know, “What kind of money do you need to live on?” so to speak. Well, I had that data. I could get those answers relatively easily. And that’s been – Again, one of my bits of advice is whether it be Quicken or any of the other tools out there that help us get in that picture of ourselves financially, utilize those tools. I say I probably put one to two hours every other week into managing my various aspects of my finances. And for me, that’s always been time very well spent.

[00:36:14] TU: Yes. Yeah. And the consistency and compound effect of that is huge over time. And it’s interesting, you’re talking about tools and Quicken. Here in 2022, obviously, there are more tools than ever, apps, that will help us, software tools. But I would argue, some of the mindset and behavior, it is getting harder and harder just because of all the things that are competing – 

[00:36:39] Dr. DZ: Or time and attention.

[00:36:40] TU: Yeah, tracking, easier execution I think is even becoming a little bit harder. Let me ask you one final question. I know we have some new practitioners that are listening. You obviously work closely with students and new grads as well. But folks that are feeling the headwind financially despite obviously making a good income, having a good potential for their income into the future but they’re facing large student loan debts. They’re looking at potentially the housing market and wanting to buy a home in this market. Inflation. Tim and Dave, you’re telling me I need to start saving early and max out my retirement accounts. I need an emergency fund. I need to get rid of my credit card debt. Just overwhelming, right? What advice would you have for those folks about some of the early wins and behaviors and habits that they can employ? 

[00:37:32] Dr. DZ: I think you nailed it right there. Early wins. One step at a time. Rather than getting overwhelmed by all of these things that are hitting you. Focus on one thing that you can do that you can impact. 

Yeah, a good example would be like my wife. Or my wife and I, shortly after we got married, she did have a little bit of college loan debt. And she was somebody – she had gotten a bachelor’s degree. She went to graduate school. And then she decided to go to pharmacy school. And so, it took her a little longer to go down that path. And she had a little bit of financial debt. We decided to focus – to prioritize on paying down that debt. It was the highest interest debt that we had. 

And we did the things that we had to, which in the short term, yeah, everyone probably meant making some sacrifices. There were some vacations we didn’t go on. Maybe we bought the used car rather than the new car or something like that. There are all the little things that one does to be able to then have a little bit more money to put in the areas that you want to prioritize. 

So, whether it’d be paying down student loan debt, or sitting to make a down payment on a house, or all the other things. I mean, the great news is, as pharmacists, we are relatively high-income folks. We have access to funds. It’s just a matter of how we decide to utilize those funds. 

But, yeah, should focus on that one thing. Don’t get overwhelmed by all of the different things and thinking to myself, “Oh, gosh. There’s so much going on here. How am I going to handle all of this?” You can handle things. Do one thing at a time. Then use that leverage, that success you have in doing one thing. So, then go do the next thing. 

[00:39:22] TU: Yeah, I love that, Dave. I talk a lot with new practitioners about that early momentum. And while any one financial decision or win may not feel monumental in the moment, it’s the compound effect in the momentum that comes from that over time. And there’s a natural excitement of like, “Okay, small win. What’s next?” Another win, what’s next? What’s next? And you look back three, five, ten years later, and some of those behaviors start to really compound and add up over time. 

[00:39:49] Dr. DZ: Oh, that’s the one thing. I remember back, I was thinking in high school, you learn about compound interest. And the idea that interest builds on interest builds on interest. And again, I think about 30, 40 years into my career span, so to speak. The decisions we made very early on are definitely paying dividends today and how they do things. 

Now, that said, I also don’t want to turn off or upset your readers who maybe aren’t that young anymore or maybe thinking of themselves, “Gee! I didn’t do that when I was you know 25-years-old. What am I going to do?” It’s never too late to start. And there’s a lot that one can do to make good financial decisions even – again, another really good habit I picked up from my parents is while I have credit cards and use them liberally, it’s with the sense of never – my dad just instilled in me. You will pay off your credit card in full every month. You will never carry a balance on these cards. 

And that’s, again, always just been part of my mindset, that I use a credit card. I get that bill out of it every – Actually, I don’t even get a bill obviously. Everything’s electronic these days. And honestly, it’s automatically withdrawn from my checking account. But I – essentially, I use the credit that’s available. Credit is not necessarily a bad thing. I’m not one of these people who will say never use credit cards. Or don’t take out interests. And don’t take out loans. I mean, heck, a lot of us, the reality is we wouldn’t go to college. We wouldn’t be able to buy a home if we didn’t take out debt. Debt can and is a good thing. It just has to be used in balance with everything else. Because if it’s not in balance, it will take over in a not so good way.

[00:41:55] TU: Well, this has been fantastic. I knew it would. And it’s delivered. And I’m excited to get this out to our community. And really excited, Dave, for you in this next phase of your preferment. I think I’m going to adopt that term. 

[00:42:09] Dr. DZ: That’s a great thing. I do think Lucinda and I should get together and write a book on preferment. But as always, one of the great things about being an educator is – you know, Tim, is you – it’s not just the impact you make on students when they’re in your classroom. It’s the impact you see as their careers move forward. 

And I’ve been so blessed and fortunate to be able to stay in touch with many of my former students and not only see the successes they’re having and the things that they’re achieving in their lives, but to be able to share what we’re all doing and so forth. And to that end, I hope some of my former students are out there and are seeing this. And I would love to be able to stay in touch if there are things that I can share more with your listeners about how one prepares to get to the point in this life. The thing, decisions that we make as we get to this point. 

I will still say, keeping on our football analogy, it’s still half time. And my wife and I are sitting in the locker room still making those plans for what we’re going to go out and do in the third quarter. And just like I’m offering advice to some folks. I’m also appreciating advice from people who have been down this pathway ourselves. And whether it’d be books or whether it’d be other folks that have made similar decisions to what we have. There’s a lot to learn. And to me, that’s always been the best part about the academic path, is it’s not the teaching. It’s the learning.

[00:43:45] TU: Absolutely. 

[00:43:46] Dr. DZ: And the more that we can learn, the better off we’ll all be. 

[00:43:49] TU: Well, that’s great. We’ll link to, in the show notes, your LinkedIn if folks aren’t already connecting with you. I know that’s a way they can reach out. All right. Thanks again, Dave. I really appreciate it.

[00:43:58] Dr. DZ: Thank you. Appreciate it a lot. Thank you very much.

[OUTRO]

[00:44:01] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the date publish. Such information may contain forward-looking statements are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacists.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacists podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 298: Preparing for Retirement with Dean Emeritus Dr. Gary Levin


Dean Emeritus Dr. Gary Levin dives into the details of preparing for retirement. He shares how his career evolved from serving in the Navy to a career in pharmacy and then nearly 30 years in academia. He talks through how early investing and saving in his first job laid the foundation for his retirement, how he dealt with market volatility throughout his career, and why he started a charter company in retirement to supplement his income. 

About Today’s Guest

Dr. Gary M. Levin is retired following a career in academia moving up the ladder from Assistant Professor at Albany College of Pharmacy to Founding Dean and Professor of the Larkin University College of Pharmacy in Miami, Florida. He was recently awarded emeritus status upon his retirement. Dr. Levin has worked in numerous Colleges of Pharmacy and Medicine including his alma mater the University of Florida where he also completed a residency in psychiatric pharmacy with the Gainesville VAMC and a Fellowship in Psychopharmacology and Pharmacokinetics at the UF College of Pharmacy.

Dr. Levin has been board certified in psychiatric pharmacy practice (BCPP) since 1996 as a member of the inaugural group to become certified. He is an elected fellow in the American College of Clinical Pharmacy (FCCP). He is a founding member and was the first elected president of the College of Psychiatric and Neurologic Pharmacists (CPNP). During his career, he precepted students, post-doctoral residents, and research fellows in pharmacy and psychiatry. This has been his greatest professional passion, to introduce students and other learners about the impact a psychiatric pharmacist can have on improving people’s lives.

Dr. Levin has been active in many professional pharmacy organizations and has held various appointed and elected positions. He has reviewed for many journals in both pharmacy and psychiatry and has served on several editorial boards. He has published over 150 peer-reviewed manuscripts, book chapters, and scientific abstracts and has received close to 1 million dollars in research and training support over his career.

His research interests have included improving outcomes in patients with psychiatric disorders, pharmacokinetics of psychoactive agents, and pharmacogenomic applications in patients with psychiatric and neurological disorders. Since 2013, upon becoming a CEO Dean, his research interests shifted to the scholarship of teaching and learning.

In his retirement he is enjoying spending more time with his wife, Toya Bowles, Pharm.D., MS, BCPP who works as a principal MSL for the Janssen neuroscience division of J&J, more time boating, traveling regularly to the Florida Keys, The Bahamas, and Mexico, and working with a private tutor to become fluent in Latin-American Spanish. He is also preparing for his US Coast Guard Captains License. He trains in Pilates and weights and has a 47th-floor balcony garden including many fruits and vegetables and a Key Lime tree that is producing too many limes in his home in Brickell Miami Florida.

Episode Summary

This week on the YFP Podcast, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, chats with Dean Emeritus, Dr. Gary Levin, on preparing for retirement. In their discussion, Gary explains how he found his way into pharmacy, ultimately pharmacy academia, from his early start in the Navy. He walks the listeners through the early stages of his career to where he is today, with guiding advice for pharmacists in all phases of their careers. Gary shares how investing and saving while working in his first faculty position laid the foundation for his retirement and how even small investments can profoundly impact the retirement paycheck.  

Throughout the episode, Gary provides his top tips for those pharmacists in the first half of their careers, experiencing market volatility and how to keep a long-term mindset in preparation for retirement: 

  1. Don’t panic.
  2. Recognize the value of having a good coach, trusted advisor, or financial planner. 
  3. Start planning for and investing for retirement as early as possible.
  4. When you get a raise, save the raise. 
  5. Minimize withdrawal.

In closing, Gary dives into the story of how he started his charter company, how he plans to utilize the company as part of his retirement strategy, and the services used to automate the process so he can fully enjoy his retirement.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[0:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, for each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, I had the pleasure of welcoming onto the show Dean Emeritus Dr. Gary Levin. Some of my favorite moments from the show include hearing his career journey from the Navy, the choosing pharmacy to spending nearly 30 years in academia, how early investing and saving in his first faculty job laid the foundation for his retirement nearly 30 years later, how he dealt with the market volatility throughout his career, to avoid panic and to keep that long-term mindset and why he decided to start a business, Captain G’s Charter Company in retirement to supplement his income and to help build his retirement paycheck.

Now before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 280 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about working one-on-one with a certified financial planner, may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com.

Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. Okay, let’s jump into my interview with Dr. Gary Levin.

[INTERVIEW]

[0:01:26] TU: Gary, welcome to the show.

[0:01:28] GL: Hi. Thanks, Tim. Thanks for having me.

[0:01:30] TU: I’m really excited to dig into your pharmacy journey a little bit, how you planned for retirement and how you’ve thought about the financial journey throughout your career, and then we’ll wrap up and talk about the business that you recently started in retirement as well. I have a feeling just based on some back and forth conversation that we had on LinkedIn and email that you’re going to have a lot to share in terms of pearls of wisdom for our listeners, whether it’s new practitioners that are listening, that are just getting started, maybe it’s some mid-career pharmacists that are feeling they’re in the thick of it as they look ahead towards the future, or perhaps folks that are nearing retirement and are able to gain something from someone who has recently made that transition. Let’s start with your career journey. What got you into pharmacy and where did you end up doing your pharmacy training?

[0:02:17] GL: Interesting story, but I was in the Navy for seven years right out of high school. I had just really been done with school. I didn’t really like school. Once I graduated, I was just working at local restaurants. I was working at a gas station back when you had an attendant pumped your gas. I mean, still New Jersey has that, but it was everywhere and I was in – I grew up in Philadelphia. Really just wanted to get out and do something completely different.

My best friend said, “Hey, let’s join the Navy on the buddy program.” We did. We went to boot camp together. Right after boot camp, we were separated. He ended up on a ship out of San Diego. I ended up as an airdale, so I actually in seven years in the Navy, I never saw a ship, except from the air. I flew on a plane that was too big to land on an aircraft carrier. When I say I flew, I didn’t fly the plane. I was back in the middle of the plane. They called us a two rat back in the middle of the two. I operated the equipment that helped us hunt Soviet submarines. My job was actually aviation anti-submarine warfare operator.

I liked it so much that I started college during some off time at – and I was stationed in Jacksonville, Florida. What we would do is we would train for about 10 or 11 months in Jacksonville for the next location that we were going to go to, and then our whole squadron of 11 planes and about 400 people would just move to a new location for six months, and then we would operate out of that location. I really got to talk about enjoying the world. I got to live for six months at a time in Sicily, in the Azores, which are Portuguese islands in the north Atlantic, Bermuda, which I was there during the height of vacation season. Was in Bermuda from April to October. That was an amazing – Not a tough deployment place to be. Okinawa and the Philippines and Spain.

I really did get to see the world. From all of those places at any given time, they would send us to another location. For example, when I was in Spain, they said, “Well, Greece wants to play some more games.” We’re going to go try and find their submarine, so we would go to Greece for a week at a time, or we would go to France for a week at a time. I really did get to see almost everything. While I was in though, I knew I wanted to go to college. I thought I wanted to be a veterinarian and that was always my plan. My classes were pre-vet. After four years in the Navy, they wanted me to re-enlist. I had really just started to take classes. While I was in at my particular rating, as long as you got an A or a B in your class, they would pay for 90% of the tuition.

I took two classes while I was in Jacksonville. At the time, it was Jacksonville Community College. I think now it’s Florida State College in Jacksonville. I took two classes and just really loved it. When I re-enlisted, my squadron was going to Keflavik Iceland for a full winter deployment. I thought, Iceland is a place where people now go on vacation. My wife said, “I can’t believe that you didn’t go to Iceland.” I said, “Well, when people go on vacation, they go for two weeks and they go in the summer.” This was six months solid winter. I think it was September to March, maybe. Full winter I said, “No, I’ve done enough of my sea duty time. I’m ready to go to shore duty.”

Because they didn’t want me to leave the squadron, they wanted me in Keflavik, Iceland, they said, “Well, the only place we can send you is Memphis.” I said, “Well, that’s fine. I’ll use that time to go to college full-time.” I did go to college full-time while I was there and still doing my pre-vet. I went to Memphis State University, which is now University of Memphis. Anyone who is a former student of mine, or interviewed at any of my colleges that I’ve worked at as a dean, probably have heard this story, because I would tell it before the actual interview day started, what my background was. I apologize to any of those that have already heard this story.

I finished my sophomore year as a pre-vet, but pre-vet, pre-pharmacy, pre-dental, pre-med, they’re all the same courses. I had friends that were going to pharmacy school. At the time, this was the early and mid-1980s. Most people, really it was the BS in pharmacy that was the predominant degree. If you were not in California, there were only about four colleges in the country that offered an entry level Pharm.D degree. My wife was in pharmacy school about the same time and she went to University of Kansas and it wasn’t even an option. She had to do her BS and then she worked for a year and then applied and went back to get her post-back Pharm.D.

We didn’t know each other at the time. We didn’t meet until 15, 20 years later at University of Florida. I didn’t want to do that. I wanted to go straight through. Because I was already a resident in Florida by being in the Navy there, I went back to Florida to go to University of Florida. I thought, “Okay, what do I do? I’m now halfway through my junior year and I’ve been pre-vet the whole time.” I went and talked to a health career advisor. Of course, the first thing they say is, what about medical school? Oh, I didn’t say why I didn’t want to be a vet. I worked for a vet in my last year at Memphis part-time. If you’re not an owner and nobody can own a practice right out of vet school, you could do residencies if you want to specialize, but they don’t pay well. We had an associate vet, so he wasn’t one of the owners. He was just working for them full-time.

Now, again, this was 1985. At that time, pharmacists were making about 35,000 a year. I said, “Do you mind me asking, what do you make?” He said USD 18,000. He paid about a 100,000 in tuition. I said, “I mean, how long is it going to be for you to pay off your student loans? USD 18,000, that wasn’t much really more. It’s a little bit more than minimum wage.” He said, his goal was to work there about five years, build up enough of a clientele that ultimately, he can own his own practice. Very similar to what dentists do and even physicians right out of training oftentimes. That was really why I decided, vet school wasn’t for me. I wasn’t going through all these years of college to make at the time, what was just half of, or a third of what a pharmacist can make.

I still didn’t think pharmacy was for me though, because a lot of my friends that were in my classes in college were going to pharmacy school, and they were going at the time, it was the BS degree. At the time, they would even say, I would say, “What is your job going to be?” They would say themselves, “Well, we take it from the big bottle. Count by fives and put it in the little bottle.” I said, “You’re going to go to school for five, six, seven years and that’s what your job is going to be for the rest of your career?” They would tell me that there’s other things to do, but you have to do advanced training. Typically, you have to get a Pharm.D.”

At the time, Florida was transitioning to – I never even thought of pharmacy school. When I talked to the health care advisor at UF, they set me up to meet with a few of the faculty to explain that there were other jobs. It doesn’t mean to say that I didn’t want to work in the community. I actually worked in the community many times as a pharmacist in my residency, in my fellowship as an assistant professor, ultimately when I got to that point. I really enjoyed working with patients.

Med school was out, because I didn’t want to do another three or four years of residency. I said, when I graduate, I just want to graduate and be able to go into practice, or training, or into my career. UF was just transitioning from the post-back Pharm.D to the entry level Pharm.D. We had to make our decision after our first year. Everyone was together in one class. After our first year, we had to decide, okay, are you going to go into the Pharm.D track, or the BS track? It was about in my year, about 40 students went into the Pharm.D track and about 60 went into the BS. Interestingly enough, probably half of those people that went into the BS track ended up doing the program that Florida had, which was the working professional Pharm.D program, because they wanted to do something different, or just advance their career, beyond a chain, or a independent pharmacy.

They wanted to move up. Even if they wanted to stay with the chain, they wanted to move up into administration. They wanted to do something different. I went the Pharm.D track. Really, my goal was still at that point, to get my Pharm.D and to work as a pharmacist, not to do any post-doctoral training. A friend of mine was working for an independent in Tampa that had three different pharmacies. He had contacted me and said, “I would like to hire you. I don’t have any Pharm.Ds at the time, but I would really like to promote the fact that you can work with patient counseling, that you could do things beyond what are behind the counter pharmacists are doing, and we’re going to promote that we have a doctor of pharmacy. You would be probably one of the few in Tampa at the time.”

Again, because most of the people that were doing – that did the post-back program, a number of them are my friends now, went into hospital pharmacy, or they went into industry. Very few were doing community pharmacy. It sounded great. After I graduated, I went to do that and nothing was any different. I was doing the exact same job as all the “retail pharmacists,” and I was working behind the counter, not doing anything different. I did that for about six months and I left to go to the VA in Tampa.

While working at the VA, a number of my friends and colleagues, and by the way, I encourage people, I always encourage people to join, either be active in your student pharmacy organizations. For me, I was most active in Kappa side. That has really helped me throughout my career. A close friend of mine, who probably many people at least in the Florida area know, Doug Covey, was working as a clinical specialist at the VA in Tampa. I said, “Doug, I want to do what you do. I want to be a clinical specialist, not just working in the pharmacy.”

The VA had said, “We want to do an experiment. We have clinical specialists who are Pharm.Ds that have either been a Pharm.D for a long period of time and have either done a residency, or if they haven’t done a residency, they’ve been a Pharm.D for a while and they’ve built up trust with the clinicians that they work with. But at your level, you’re going to be in the middle.” I got to work with him in a cardiology clinic in the Coumadin Clinic and in a refill clinic. People that ran out of their medication, but they couldn’t get an appointment with a physician for probably three months. They would meet with us. It was me and three other Pharm.Ds from my class and we would actually review their chart, make sure that everything was stabilized so that we can actually write a prescription for them. This was before pharmacists actually wrote prescriptions in the VA.

What we wrote was a recommendation and the physician had, I think, about 72 hours to review it and say that he agreed with it. In all sense, we were writing prescriptions and this was in 1990. I really enjoyed doing that, but it was really only one day a week and then a half day a week working in the cardiology clinic with Doug and a half day a week doing the Coumadin Clinic, but I wanted to do that full-time. His best advice was, “Gary, you really need to go back and do a residency.”

The two things that I enjoy the most in pharmacy school, at least through my rotations, actually three. One was emergency medicine and toxicology. A friend of mine, who many people know in Florida and around the country is Joe Spillane. Joe was a year ahead of me in doing a two-year program in Jacksonville. It was considered a two-year fellowship. Another was ambulatory care, that was with John Gums at the University of Florida. Again, it was a two-year fellowship and probably, my favorite thing was psychiatry.

Now, psychiatry was a one-year residency at the VA in Gainesville. I got along amazingly with the preceptor. I got to know him during my rotation. They basically, this was before, if you did a specialty residency, you didn’t have to apply for a PGY2. This was before the time of PGY1s and PGY2s. Pharm.Ds could either do either a general clinical residency, which was pretty much what a PGY1 is now, or a specialty residency, what a PGY2 is now. But you could go into it right after your Pharm.D degree.

I wasn’t prepared to make a two-year commitment, so I did the one-year residency in psychiatry, or psychiatric pharmacy practice. Now, of course, actually, it was probably 1994 became the specialty board certified psychiatric pharmacy and I was in the first group of people to do that and I’ve maintained it ever since. I’ve re-certified four times, the most recent being for 2022. Three times, I did it by exam. The last time, because I was so far out of practice and I really wanted to do it just to keep my specialty, because I was the founding president of the College of Psychiatric and Neurologic Pharmacy, which this year will become known as the American Association of Pharmacy Practitioners, I think. AAPP.

[0:17:55] TU: Oh, cool. I didn’t know that transition was happening. Okay.

[0:17:57] GL: This year is the transition year. Anything that you see about them, it’ll say CPNP/AAPP.

[0:18:05] TU: Yeah. Okay.

[0:18:06] GL: Because of that and because of still being known with them and associated with them, I’ve gone to every meeting, I think, since they started in 1992 and I helped found that original meeting. I kept my board certification. This will definitely be my last one. That’s a long background, but that’s how I got into psych. When I first started, my residency preceptor asked me, “Okay, do you want to do a fellowship?” His name is Lindsay DeVane. He is the editor. He’s retired, but he’s the editor now of The Journal of Pharmacotherapy. He’s been the editor-in-chief for probably about five years, six years. He still has some practice with research at Medical University of South Carolina. He asked me that my first day in. I said, “I really want to practice as a clinical psychiatric pharmacist.”

After about three months with him, I realized that I wanted to do what he did, which was academic pharmacy, have a clinical practice, have a research practice, had an academic practice and teach. When I said I didn’t know yet, he said, “Well, you do need to decide by your third month, because if you want to do a fellowship, we need to start applying for grants now.” At three months, we did. But I said, “Lindsay, but I don’t want to do a two-year fellowship. I want to do a one-year fellowship.” He said, “That’s fine, if you’re willing to do fellowship work as a resident. It’s going to be a busy year, but you’re going to be a resident, but you’re going to be starting, laying the foundation for the fellowship, basically, by writing grants.” I said, “I’m fine with that.”

I ended up doing a residency in fellowship, which is a total two years post-doc at University of Florida and with the VA in Gainesville, Florida. Really, that was it. That’s what took off as my academic career. At that point, I’d been in Florida, I think a total of 11 years, between being in Gainesville, in the Navy. Well, more than that, as you count my Navy time, UF time. I was ready for a complete change. I applied for a number of positions, but ended up as my first academic position at Albany College of Pharmacy, which I think now is Albany College of the Health Sciences. I was there for seven years.

Then, I won’t go through my whole academic history, but my mentor left to go to MUSC and the department chair at the time, Larry Lopez, called me and asked if I had any interest in coming back to University of Florida. I was already an associate professor, so I’ve made that first academic step. Ultimately, I did go back to University of Florida as an associate professor. That’s my career from there.

[0:21:04] TU: That’s awesome. Thanks for sharing. Most recently, you were the founding dean at Larkin University down in Miami. Since you made that transition into retirement, I want to talk a little bit about that transition and some of the planning that you did leading up to that. I think for many pharmacists in the first, let’s just say, decade, or the career that I talked to, for good reasons, they’re feeling overwhelmed with over six figures of student loan debt. Average right now is about a USD 170,000. Obviously, we’re dealing with high inflation right now, a pretty crazy housing market, uncertainty and volatility with the with the stock markets.

All that to say, I think the idea of saving for retirement and getting to that point of, “I’ve made it,” and we could talk about what that means, can feel overwhelming. To some, it probably just feels out of touch. It’s so far away. It feels so big, so scary and, “Am I really going to get there and what planning do I need to do?” My question for you as we get into a little bit of your strategy of preparing and getting to the point of being able to be in a financial position to retire, at what point in your career did you start thinking, “I need to start planning and saving for retirement”? Was that something that you were doing all along? Was there a mentor, or a guide that you had? At what point were you beginning to think, “Hey, I’ve got to really be planning for the future”?

[0:22:28] GL: I think I was very fortunate in my first academic position, Albany College of Pharmacy, because people there had a mindset of preparing for retirement. It was actually the only place that I’ve ever worked at that – I mean, Albany College of Pharmacy was the fourth College of Pharmacy in the nation. They’ve been around since the 1800s. Therefore, I mean, they have a, for just being a College of Pharmacy, as opposed to a large university with many colleges, I think they are very, very well endowed, because they have hundreds of – well, not hundreds, but well over a hundred years of alumni. Now many of those alumni have passed away. But they’ve had alumni for many, many years.

One of my favorite things to do when I had a break was to walk through the administrative wing and they had pictures, like most colleges do, of their – somewhere near the dean’s office is the big picture of all the graduates in a composite picture. One of my favorite things to do was to go and look at the founding, well all the classes, but look how the styles changed, of coats and ties, and the number of women that came into –

[0:23:46] TU: Demographic.

[0:23:46] GL: Yeah, the demographics of the program. But they had pictures going back to the first class, which I don’t remember the exact year, but it was somewhere in the 1880s. Looking at what that class was like. It was maybe 18 students, all male for 30 years and then you see the first female. But because they had this large endowment, they were really able to have a great benefits package. Their benefits package for all employees, faculty, or staff, or anybody was that they gave you a 10%, not match, but they just gave you 10% of your salary every year into your retirement fund, which was TIAA-CREF, which is the majority of colleges, universities and I think hospitals, probably have TIAA-CREF as an option.

It was their only option. It’s been at least one, or the only option at most of the colleges I worked for. I think I worked for seven colleges, or pharmacy, or universities. They just put in 10% right off the bat. I’ve never heard of that. When I was at University of Florida, they had a 10% match, but of course, it was a match. If you put in 2%, they put in 2%. But they go up to 10. The fact that Albany right off the bat gave you 10%, the first year that I was there, I was concerned about student loans. My wife had student loans.

Actually, I take that back. She didn’t have student loans. She had a different profession before pharmacy, so she was able to pay for her pharmacy degree all the way through. It was really just me. Now, I ended with about close to USD 30,000 of student loans. You’re probably better at this than me, USD 30,000 in 1990 –

[0:25:44] TU: Just thinking that. Yeah, yeah.

[0:25:45] GL: Then for two years, I didn’t pay back for my residency and fellowship and interest accumulates. Interest at that time, most people probably don’t remember, but in the eighties, I know housing interests when as hot housing to buy a house. I bought a house when I moved to Gainesville in 1986. My mortgage interest was 12%. That was an owner financed, because they did a lot and they said, “If you go to the bank, it’ll probably be 14% or 15%.”

[0:26:19] TU: That’s right.

[0:26:20] GL: People right now that are faced with 5% –

[0:26:24] TU: Five, 6% looks good, right?

[0:26:26] GL: Five, six. I think last week, it actually dropped a little bit when the Fed raised three quarters of a point, rates dropped below five. People should jump on that. Because we’re probably never going to see two and a half, or 3% again.

[0:26:42] TU: Yeah. That’s something I talked about on a recent show. I graduated in 2008, as our listeners know. We’ve been spoiled for those that are in or since that time period, we’ve been spoiled with extremely low historical interest rates. I think we’ve been accustomed to this is just the way it is. 0 percent car financing, 3%, 2.8%, 30-year fixed rate mortgages on homes. Student loan interest rates, especially for those that need to refinance on the private side, really low. That’s not what it’s always been. I think, I’ve talked to my parents about this and other guests as well, but there certainly have been time periods of higher inflation and will we see those lower rates again or not? We’ll see in the future.

It’s interesting you mentioned how impactful that early contribution from Albany; them providing 10%. Even when you got to Florida, the 10% match. I mean, outside of academic institutions, those are unheard of today for many of our pharmacists, especially that work out in the private sector. They’re going to have to work a little bit harder on their own. You’re not going to see 8%, 10% matches and you’re certainly not going to see a whole lot of contributions being made without a match.

My question for you and I think one that probably a lot of listeners are struggling with in the moment is dealing with the current volatility, and especially for those that have not been through this. I go back to my experience. 2008, just graduated. I was doing residency at the time, making a whopping USD 31,000. I didn’t own a home. Outside of gas being expensive, I didn’t feel that recession. If anything, I was able to start my investing career, buying low and really saw the upside of that for almost 14 years, until we had the recent dip. Even the dip in the pandemic, back to March 2020, it was so short-lived, I’m not sure we saw the impact, like a 2008 recession or others before, where maybe we have people that have now been 10 to 15 years into their career, have never dealt with this kind of volatility. Maybe they’ve accrued three, four, five, USD 600,000. This is the first time they’re looking at saying, “Yeesh. I just lost 30% to 40% of my portfolio.”

This is the first test, I think, for many of like, “Am I really in it for the long-term? And making sure I don’t make any decisions in the short-term that are going to hurt me.” What advice would you have for folks that are – especially on that first half of their career that are experiencing this volatility, that are questioning their investment strategy and are maybe even wondering, is it worth it when there’s other competing expenses where I could be putting these dollars? You’ve lived through some of these cycles and obviously weathered them. Tell us your thoughts on that.

[0:29:26] GL: My first recommendation would be to never panic. So many people took money, or took their money that they had invested in especially the 2008, which was the biggest. 2007 leading up to that. So many people took their money and just put it into cash, or money market, which probably pays 1%. Or you can move it into annuity which pays 2% or 3%. But me and my wife, we looked at it as, this is an excellent opportunity to buy low, because we’re continuing to put in every paycheck, so we’re buying as low as possible.

Anybody that follows the stock market and if they don’t, then I encourage that everybody have a financial planner. As a department chair, I’ve been a department chair twice and a dean twice. In both of those positions, I saw myself not just as an employee mentor, but as a life mentor as much as I could be, because I went through having – I have one son, he’s 27 now. I went through having a child, or a baby while I was in academia, changing jobs, spouse changing jobs, all the sorts of things, buying houses, all the sorts of things that they’re going through, we’re going to go through. I encourage them to start putting money away as early as they can.

I have had, and here’s the part where I would never name names, but I have had faculty, many of them say to me, “I have been told by my financial planner, or advised to pay off my student loans first before I put money away.” I personally disagree with that, because you will get your student loans paid off long before you retire. But I don’t know, but compound an interest, if you put a USD 100 a month away at age, let’s say 25, at age 65 or 70, that USD 100, if you go by the general rule and the general rule is every seven years, your money doubles. That includes ups and downs in the markets, that every seven years. If you have a longer period of no downs and there’s definitely more ups than downs, that USD 100 – I mean, I don’t know how many sevens that is, but that USD 100 is probably several thousand.

If you’re doing that once a month, I mean, you’re talking about getting into the hundreds of thousands of dollars. It’s not uncommon for people that do that, to retire with well over a million dollars. A lot of pharmacists are married to pharmacists. If they’re not married to pharmacists, they’re often married to other people doing very well in the health care, like nurses, physicians, nutritionists, any other health care practitioner that’s making 60,000 and up. These are people where both of them could be putting away.

The way I started when I had that 10%, I realized that it was 10% of not much and I didn’t know that pharmacy salaries – as a faculty member, I started at 48,000. I didn’t know that that would go to well over a 100,000. I looked at it as it’s 10% of not very much, but it’s USD 4,800 a month going in. The first year, we focused on buying a house. We really decided, okay, we’re not going to put anything away. I plan that every year, I’m probably going to get a raise. That’s another benefit of Albany College of Pharmacy. We had good raises. Many people that work for state universities, they might not get a raise like privates will get. Private universities will typically look at what is the consumer inflation index and the average, I mean, I realized this year is not a normal year, but the average is around 2%.

What they’ll do is most company, or most private universities will take that 2% and add 2% to that and they’ll say, “Our average raise this year is going to be 4%.” Depending on merit, it’s going to vary between the very worst person is going to get 2% and the highest might get 6%. At Albany, I typically ranged between 4% and 6% and 2 years in a row. I got the highest raise in the university. That’s great, but not normal. It wasn’t that way my entire career, but it was two great years.

My goal was always, whatever my raise was, if my raise was 4%, 2% I was going to enjoy in my salary and 2% I was going to put into the match. I did that every year, so that by the time I left Albany after seven years, I was matching that 10% that they were putting in. Again, that was 10% of a relatively no number, even though I was there seven years with some great pay raises. When I left there, I was making, I think, it was 67. Then I went to University of Florida as a associate professor in 1999 and started at 75.

Pharmacists coming out were making more than that. They were making about 80. It was not until I became vice chair for the department at University of Florida and the stipend that I got for being vice chair. At that point, about nine years in academia, vice chair for the department and I’m finally making as much as one of our graduates.

[0:35:09] TU: Yeah. I think there’s so much wisdom in what you shared of the habit that then has a compound effect. You mentioned your example of 4%-ish, maybe a little bit higher at Albany. Taking a portion of that and building the behavior of I’m going to save it and invest it. Because salaries go up if, you’ve built that behavior based on a percentage that not only is that number going to go up, but then the compound effect of that number is going to go up, even more over time. I think that’s a really good strategy.

I’ve been recording some of the lessons that you’re sharing here, and I’ve got four so far. Number one we talked about, don’t panic. We’re going to experience volatile periods in the market as we are right now. Number two is –

[0:35:49] GL: I guess, with don’t panic, try not to look every day if you’re invested.

[0:35:54] TU: Be informed, but not in it so much that you’re panicking.

[0:35:57] GL: Right. Because you’re not in it for day to day. You’re in this for 20, or 30 years from now. There will be ups and there will be downs, but no matter what, if you look at the market from the date they started recording, it goes like that.

[0:36:11] TU: Yup. That’s right.

[0:36:12] GL: It’s a mountain slope.

[0:36:14] TU: Number one, don’t panic. Number two is the value of having a good coach, a trusted advisor and planner. I think that relates to number one, because a good coach and a planner is going to talk you through some of the volatile time periods to make sure we’re looking long-term. Number three, you mentioned start as early as possible and you gave some good examples and numbers of what, it’s a USD 100 a month equal over time. Then number four, we just talked about this concept of save the raise, is what I call it. If we get raises over time, if we can build the discipline to put away a portion of that, that’s going to have a huge impact over time.

My last financial question before we transition and wrap up by talking a little bit about what you’re doing on the business side of retirement, is that saving for retirement is one thing. We talk a lot about building a nest egg. We talk a lot about how much might someone need. Is it one, or two, or three million dollars, but building a retirement paycheck and determining how you’re going to actually withdraw that money and the strategy for doing that is a completely different thing. We don’t talk as much about that, I think, in the financial services world. We talk about the accrual phase a lot, but we don’t talk as much about the withdrawal strategy. This is really where a lot can happen in terms of mistakes made, or opportunities, if we can optimize this phase. Can you can you share, especially for those listening that are getting ready, or see on the horizon that retirement phase, what your strategy has been thus far, or what you’re planning to do for withdrawing these various funds that you’ve accrued throughout your career as you begin to build that retirement paycheck?

[0:37:51] GL: I try to take out as little as possible. I’m very fortunate in that my wife is younger than me and she will probably work about five to six more years before retiring from J&J. She has a very healthy income, too. That allowed me to retire and really not have to touch any of my funds. However, I’ll try and make it for anybody that still has either a spouse retiring, or you both retired at the same time. Social Security, we have to mention that. Right now, they say, I think that there’s about 30 years left. This is just something I believe as a core in my heart that Social Security will not go away. I mean, it’s a promise –

[0:38:36] TU: I agree.

[0:38:37] GL: – that the government has made since what, FDR was president, when it started.

[0:38:42] TU: It would be catastrophic if it does.

[0:38:44] GL: I believe, it would lead to something like a civil war. Much, much worse than the January 6th insurrection. Because you’re affecting tens of millions of people, not a couple hundred thousand that are upset. Tens of millions of people. And that have been putting away. When Obama was president and they first started to talk about there being potentially an end, or a lifetime of Social Security that it has to come to an end. Well, if it has to come to an end, you have to stop taking from people. Social Security, and say, take this money and invest it on your own, but we can’t continue to take it and make money off of you and then say, it’s gone. It’s not. For those that don’t know, it’s seven and a half percent, I think, or 7.55% and your employer pays 7.55%.

[0:39:44] TU: That’s right.

[0:39:45] GL: If you’re self-employed, it’s double that, so you’re paying the entire 15% yourself. That’s a lot of money to take from somebody for 40, 50 years and then say, we’re not going to give you anything. Even the people that are billionaires, they took that money from them I think they owe them something in return. Now, I do believe that they can move to a sliding scale. People that are billionaires probably don’t need to get USD 2,000 a month. I’m very supportive of a sliding scale. But that sliding scale should not be the number that I’ve heard talked about, like 200, or USD 220,000, because two pharmacists could be making over USD 220,000 that are partners. Maybe not after they retire, but they might have more than that, a lot more than that in their retirement funds.

We all live, and I have this other – This is just the rule of Gary. Everybody lives to about a half a percent, or 1% beyond their means. If we didn’t, we would have no need for credit cards, lines of credit. We all tend to live at our means, but just a tiny bit over that that we’re always comfortable. We shouldn’t have to change that, because social security goes away. I don’t think that, again, that’s not a promise. That’s just my opinion. It’ll never go away. It may change, but I don’t think it’ll ever go away, that would lead to, I believe, something as big as a civil war, that catastrophic.

I’m one of the last few years. I’m a baby boomer, but on the last few years. I was born in 1960. I was eligible to start Social Security at ’62. Every year that you wait in not taking it, that goes up 8%. If I took it at ’63, it would be 8% more than when I was ’62. I’m not. If I wait till ’64, it’s another 8%. When we look at market volatility over time, we consider 8% per year over say, a 10 or 15-year of good, or average years. Six percent if you want to be conservative, 8% if you want to meet what the S&P has generally done over time and 10% if you want to say, “Well, I feel like I’m retiring, or the next 10 years should be pretty good.”

I have not started taking my Social Security, because there’s nothing in life that’s guaranteed, right, other than death and taxes. This is something that’s guaranteed. There are three things is that every year, you don’t take your Social Security. It goes up 8%. My goal is to not take it at least until my wife retires. If that’s in five years, I’ll be 67 and that would have gone up five times eight, 40%. Right now, my retirement check would look somewhere around, I think, USD, 2,200. I think it would be 3,000 or over at 67.

[0:42:55] TU: Let’s shift gears here and wrap up with the work that you are doing in your own business. You’re retired from pharmacy, still working though not as a pharmacist, but have decided to start your own company. Tell us about Captain G’s, what the business is all about and what you’re working on.

[0:43:12] GL: Great. I still want to mention that I’m still licensed. I don’t know why I’m still licensed as a pharmacist. It’s just something we work so long on and have for so long. I don’t know if it’s a safety net. I think most places would rather hire someone that has a lot of a career left than somebody like me. But if I had to do per diem, I certainly would. I always said that I’d work behind a counter before I would live under a bridge. But I wouldn’t be behind the counter. Like I said, I’d be out there helping patients and hope all the pharmacists that are listening to this do that, or counseling, or anything else that you would consider helping their quality of life.

I retired about a year and a half ago and I really never planned to do this. Well, actually, I had planned to do it. That was creating a charter service with my boat. We had a larger boat. We had a 45-foot boat when I retired, with a fly bridge, which is a pretty big boat. Three state rooms, two heads or bathrooms on it, a full galley, an outdoor kitchen and grill. I probably could have lived on that boat. We tried it. We actually, when we lived in Coconut Grove, which is a very popular area in Miami, we did Airbnb for one week a month –

[0:44:33] TU: Oh, cool.

[0:44:34] GL: – for our house and lived on the boat to see if we enjoyed living on a boat. Because that was always my goal, to try and get my wife to say, “Let’s not have a mortgage on the house and a boat. Let’s just get a big boat, big enough to live on.” It probably would have been a 60-foot boat. That experience though, she said, “I can’t live on a boat. I just can’t do it. Too small of a space. Not enough closet space, etc., and not a bathtub. My wife loves a bathtub, not a shower.” But we still owed a couple 100,000 on that boat when I wanted to retire. She said, “Look, we’ve got a lot of equity in this boat. Why don’t you sell it?”

It was right around the time that quarantine had ended and people wanted to get out and the boating market and the housing market, that’s when they both really started to skyrocket. Boats were selling literally in a day, just like houses. I hired a broker. We had literally three cash offers. We had three cash offers before COVID. Then the pandemic hit and it cooled down. The same people that had an offer on the boat when the quarantine ended came back and said, “We’ll buy it.” They tried to offer us a lower amount. I said, “No, we have two other cash offers for one day. No survey. We’ve already done all this with you, a marine survey. Take it as it is,” and they did.

Then, I ended up with about USD 250,000 in equity. My wife said, that was the original plan was take what you get in equity and just buy a boat outright. I did that. I looked around for a while and found an amazing boat that if anybody’s interested in a boat, buy a used one and typically, look at three years. Boats depreciate at 20% the first year like a car, 12% the second year and 8% the third year. After that, they plateau and appreciate about 2% to 3% a year.

Really, 40% of depreciation is in the first three years and it hasn’t been used that much. We were fortunate to find one that only had a 100 hours on the engine. Two state rooms in it, full galley. We went to one bathroom, but a separate shower. I had thought about chartering it and I didn’t want to put all those hours on it. I talked to a couple charter companies and they said, “You know, when we do charters, it’s really about the people being in the water. You’re not really taking them on a tour of Miami and the Keys. You’re not cruising at 30 knots, or 30 miles an hour, which uses a gallon pretty much every mile, you’re burning about a gallon, which is a lot of money.”

I mean, when we go to Bimini or the Keys, it costs about 60 gallons to get there. Well, marine fuel is less expensive, especially marine diesel, it’s still about USD 4 a gallon. It’s a lot of money to get to Bimini and back. That’s what I was thinking is that’s a lot of fuel, that’s a lot of hours. That means more maintenance I’m going to be paying on the boat, everything. In talking to a couple of charter companies, I realized that the ideal charter is four hours in length. It’s basically an hour of cruising around and you’re cruising relatively slow, eight to 10 knots, which burns maybe one gallon during that time period. One, maybe one and a half gallon. That was about USD 6 of fuel during that first hour. Showing them around. Then typically, they want to anchor and go out in the water and swim. We let them do that. They typically play in the water for two hours and then it’s about an hour to get back. It doesn’t put a lot of time. Each charter puts about two hours of engine time on my boat, but the amount of money that people pay for a charter for a boat of my size is great.

[0:48:27] TU: Makes sense. They don’t want to own it. They want to enjoy it.

[0:48:29] GL: They just want to enjoy it. My company is Captain G’s. Www.captain.gs, g for Gary, S for Captain G’s .net.

[0:48:43] TU: We’ll link to that in the show notes, so people can see that.

[0:48:45] GL: Okay. If you see anywhere on that page, I also do a second job and that’s because I’ve had a number of people call me and say, I just went up from a single engine to a double engine, or I’ve moved to a boat that has an air conditioner, or a generator, or I’ve went from gas to diesel, there’s just a lot of new things that I don’t know how to manage. I’ve owned everything, from an 18-foot to a 45-foot, all over 30 years. I started with an 18-foot bow rider right out of my fellowship and I’ve owned a boat ever since. I’m on my 11th boat. This will be my last boat. No sense in getting a bigger boat, because I like the number of people that I take out on the charter. Maximum is eight people and average is going to be typically, anywhere from two to six.

My first three charters, two were last week. Two were two weekends ago and one was this past weekend and we’re in low season. They said, I’ll probably get five to seven a month in low season. Then in November, we pick up into high season and they said, I’ll probably get around 11 to 15.

[0:49:51] TU: Wow. Wow.

[0:49:53] GL: Now, that’s a lot of work for me. I don’t want to do all that work. I want to enjoy the income that it brings. I like getting out on the water. My goal is to do about four charters a month. I get one so far. I was on a vacation to Asheville, so I have a backup, Captain Natasha. She’s relatively young, but extremely experienced and she captains boats up to 75 feet. She does – handling mine is like me playing with a tinker toy. She doesn’t even hire a mate when she does mine, when she charters 75-foot boats, she’ll have a mate with her too, to help getting the drinks, helping with the water toys, all that. I had my first one where I captained it, just this past Saturday for four hours.

Because we were coming back at night, I had my wife with me, because Miami can be pretty busy even at night. She just helped as a lookout and helped me dock back in. She served as the first mate. We bought a pair of walkie talkies, so we could seem very professional.

[0:50:59] TU: That’s cool.

[0:51:00] GL: She had it in her ear. It looked pretty cool. It was great. It was just a couple and we dropped them off at a restaurant when we were done. If it makes enough money to pay for my slip, slips are not expensive, or not cheap, especially in Miami. I have a type of slip where it’s called a full-service marina. You can get fuel there. They do minor repairs for free. Major repairs, they’ll bring somebody in, but I haven’t had any major, knock on wood. Minor things, they’ll do for free. If it’s anything that a charter customer did, like let’s say, they put a hole in a seat, then the charter – the company that I work with, or partner with, which is called theadvantaged.com. It’s www.theadvantaged.com. If you click anywhere on my website to do a charter, it’ll go directly to my boat on their website.

[0:52:01] TU: Got it.

[0:52:03] GL: The reason for that is, I don’t want to deal with the clientele. I don’t want to deal with people saying, “Hey, I want it for USD 200 less. I want this. I want that.” I want another company to do that, so theadvantaged does that. Do they make a fee? Yeah, they make 50% after the captain is paid, which is either me or Natasha, but we get the tip 100%, which is typically 20% of the full charter price and we each split 50% of it at the end. It’s very good.

I probably figure that I will need a service more often than once a year, maybe once every eight or nine months, especially once we get into season. A service costs about USD 4,000. I do expect that I’ll have additional expenses, but things that I was paying for already. My slip is 1,295 a month. That fuel, these are things that I’m paying for already, regular upkeep. All this can be written off now as an expense of the company. I hired a company called Zen Business, which is an ideal company for people that want to start small businesses and don’t want to do all the paperwork themselves.

They’ve handled my Florida S Corp, creating an S corporation. They’ve handled getting my EIN number, which is basically the social security number of a business for federal purposes and taxes. They’ve handled everything. Theadvantaged handles everything with the clients. They actually even take the money, I deal with nothing unless somebody hands me a cash tip. It’s been great. I mean, I like to get out on the water. Like I said, I don’t want to be out there every day of the month, or even every other day, because I want my time to go out with me and my wife and our friends also. We take friends out, probably once every other weekend. Again, I’ll do it about four times and Natasha can do the rest, or second backup.

[0:54:08] TU: I love that. I mean, you’re already building the system of the beginnings, at least of the business and having other people involved, doing what you want to enjoy, but not taking up so much time. I think that fits in so well to that fifth lesson we were talking about minimizing withdrawal, because obviously, there’s an opportunity there for additional income that can further allow that delay of social security and other type of withdrawal.

[0:54:32] GL: Exactly. We were, without me starting social security, I was having to take out about USD 20,000 twenty a year. I don’t think I’ll have to take out anything, which again, just let’s continue to build.

[0:54:44] TU: Yeah, that’s right. Yeah.

[0:54:47] GL: I only wish that I had additional money to put in during this low time.

[0:54:50] TU: I know.

[0:54:51] GL: I don’t. If it gets big enough, I will continue to put money in. Because my wife’s still working, she’s still putting in –

[0:54:59] TU: Contributing at the low.

[0:55:02] GL: Yeah, at the low amount, knowing that it’s going to grow.

[0:55:04] TU: Yeah. Well, this has been great. I really appreciate your time and sharing some of your journey here with our listeners and especially for those folks that are looking ahead and thinking about the journey over the course of their career, I think this will be really insightful. Thank you, Gary, for taking time to come on the show. I appreciate it.

[0:55:21] GL: Tim, if there’s one biggest thing that I can say, especially for those that have student loans, by all means, don’t forget your student loans. But take something, even if it’s a USD 100 a month, USD 50 a month, USD 10 a week, anything. Just start it. Make it as an auto withdrawal, so you don’t even notice it. Remember, when you take it out if your paycheck to put into retirement, you’re typically going to do it where you’re not going to pay taxes on that amount. If you take out a 100 a month, it’s only going to look like you’ve taken out USD 70 a month.

Now, there’s a whole other option that you can do where you do it after taxes and put it in as an IRA. That’s probably a whole another session for Tim to talk about. That wasn’t an option when I started my career. That only started about seven years ago. If it was, I would have done that, because I’m going to be taxed on everything that I take out. Whereas, if you do this relatively new option, yes you’re going to pay taxes now, but not when you need it in retirement.

[0:56:24] TU: That’s right. That’s right. Many folks now have access to a Roth. Not just the Roth IRA, but also a Roth 401k, or Roth 403b.

[0:56:31] GL: Right, right. If you do a whole show on that, please let me know. I’d love to listen in on it.

[0:56:36] TU: Yeah. Awesome. Thanks so much, Gary. I appreciate it.

[0:56:38] GL: Thank you, Tim. Thanks, listeners.

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[0:56:41] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment, or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding material should not be construed as a solicitation, or offer to buy or sell any investment, or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment.

Furthermore, the information contained in our archive, newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer.

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 274: Risk Tolerance vs Risk Capacity (Retirement Planning)


Risk Tolerance vs Risk Capacity (Retirement Planning)

In part three of the four-part series on retirement planning, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, explain why it’s critical to evaluate how much risk you are able to stomach versus how much risk you should take to achieve your long-term savings goal and considerations for setting asset allocation in alignment with your risk capacity. 

Episode Summary

YFP Co-founders Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®,  explain the difference between risk tolerance and risk capacity in this episode, the third part of the four-part series on retirement planning. Tim and Tim explain why it’s critical to evaluate how much risk you can stomach versus how much risk you should take to achieve your long-term savings goal, and considerations for setting asset allocation in alignment with your risk capacity. Tim and Tim break down some strategies to employ when your risk tolerance and capacity are not in alignment. They connect the topic of the retirement nest egg to asset allocation. What we determine we need for the nest egg, combined with risk tolerance or risk capacity, will guide asset allocation. Tim Baker shares the value of a financial planner as an objective third-party in making retirement planning decisions, explains how preconceived notions about money impact the financial plan, and mentions early and ongoing financial literacy to increase risk tolerance. The five to ten years leading up to retirement can be a period of uncertainty, and Tim and Tim explain the sequence of returns risk during that time frame. They close with a reminder to revisit asset allocation percentages over time to maintain the amount of risk initially planned.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to The YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I continue our four-part retirement planning series by discussing the difference between risk tolerance and risk capacity, and how this impacts your asset allocation plan. Highlights from the show include why it’s critical to evaluate how much risk you’re able to stomach, versus how much risk you should take to achieve your long-term goals. discussing strategies to employ when your risk tolerance and your risk capacity don’t jive and some considerations when setting your asset allocation plan to be in alignment with your risk capacity.

Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one on one with more than 270 households in 40 plus states. YFP planning offers fee only, high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional.

If you’re interested in learning more about how working one on one with a certified financial planner, may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call by visiting yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission on how pharmacists achieve financial freedom.

Okay, let’s jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker.

[INTEVIEW]

[00:01:25] TU: Welcome everyone to this week’s episode of the YFP, podcast excited to have Tim Baker alongside me again as we continue our four-part series on retirement planning. On Episode 272, just two weeks ago, we talked about determining how much is enough when you’re saving for retirement. Last week, episode 273, we talked about the alphabet soup of retirement accounts with a focus on those tax advantaged accounts. In this episode, we’re going to focus and dive into further on how to differentiate risk tolerance versus risk capacity, which ultimately leads to how the funds are going to be allocated within your various accounts as you’re putting together your savings strategy, also known as asset allocation.

So, Tim Baker, let’s start with why this topic matters and the connection to the nest egg ultimately, that folks may need to take just about the risks they think two or perhaps even more or less.

[00:02:18] TB: Yeah, I think this is one of the probably the most important concepts to understand. Because I think once you understand it, it’s kind of the easiest thing to adapt to better improve your financial situation, especially for like long term investment for the sake of retirement. So, I think a lot of people leave a lot of meat on the bone with regard to opportunity to improve their financial planning, because they either lack the experience or they don’t understand it, or it’s scary. But I think understanding this concept between what your risk tolerance is and what your risk capacity is, and then adapting that to your portfolio is huge. Again, we’ll kind of talk about conservative Jane versus aggressive Jane and really, all of the factors that are involved in that. One of the easiest ones to kind of change your dial up has to do with risk and ultimately, your asset allocation, which we’ll get into today.

[00:03:08] TU: Yeah, and I think this is a topic, Tim, where like, just being honest with yourself and having some self-awareness on how do I feel about the risk that I’m taking. Obviously, we’re going to talk about the importance of putting that alongside of your goals, do those jive, do they not jive. And I think this is really where the value of a third party can come in as well, when you’re looking at whether it’s one individuals, two individuals doing the financial plan, but often we might need to be both pushed and or held accountable. Obviously, an objective third party can play a really valuable role there.

So, I think we’ve all been told before, at some point or another that, hey, we’ve got to take some risk, if we’re willing to achieve, those big lofty, long term goals that we have. We talked about in episode 272, we need this big number 2, 3, 4 or $5 million, that seems way off into the distance, or perhaps for folks that are a little bit closer to that, not so far off in the distance. But regardless, it can feel overwhelming. And so, we’ve got to take some risk to get to that goal. But I don’t think we often differentiate this concept of risk tolerance versus risk capacity. So, Tim, let’s start there, break these two down in terms of definition of tolerance versus capacity.

[00:04:16] TB: Yeah, the tolerance is what we’ll start with, and this is typically the one that most people understand and know about. When I think of risk tolerance, I think of like the questionnaire. So, probably a buyer’s perspective, one of the things that we need to do to make sure that we’re doing our due diligence with a client is to ask them some questions about their experience, their outlook on the market, their understanding of how stocks and bonds work. If x loss, how they would feel about x loss or x gain and what their actions would be.

So, it’s really based on a questionnaire. From the advisor perspective, it’s really based on what we think the client can handle in a down-market. So, we’re trying to build out the best, and again, what we’re trying to do here, ultimately, is to get the best possible return for the least amount of risk, and that’s what asset allocation is. So, from the investor’s perspective, or in our case, the advisor or the client’s perspective, it’s the amount of risk that you want to take. It’s more of an emotional thing.

To me, that is basically the starting point for the conversation at least. And there are a lot of ways to get about, like what your risk tolerance are. So, one of them is kind of the rule of thumb, and I think I misspoke on a couple episodes back when we talked about this, because I think they’ve actually adapted it, the general rule of thumb. So, the general rule of thumb is that, to get your risk tolerance, you take 110, and then you subtract out your age, and then that gives you the amount of stocks or equities that should be in your portfolio.

So, if you’re 30 years old, 110 minus 30, you should have an 80% of your portfolio in stocks, or equities, and then the remaining 20% in fixed income or bonds. I think that that is a terrible rule of thumb myself. I think that’s a rule of thumb that doesn’t like necessarily hold up. But it’s what a lot of people use to kind of get started. The other way is to kind of go actually go through like a risk questionnaire, and I know Vanguard is one that – you can do that for free, go to their website and basically answer a few questions and it says, “Voila, you are 60/40, or you’re 70/30”, whatever that is. And I would actually start there before using any rule of thumb.

So again, the risk tolerance team is basically what we think you can handle on a down-market, or what you think as a client, you want to take. It’s more of an emotional thing.

If we shift over to risk capacity, this, from an advisor perspective is based on what you can actually handle on a down-market. So, this is actually using some numbers and looking at time horizon, and things like that. So, from your perspective or the investor’s perspective, it’s how much risk you should take. It’s more objective, and factors, and savings rate, goals, time horizons, think things like that. Again, it goes back to that amount of the risk that you can handle.

To give you an example of a risk capacity, versus risk tolerance, say we’re both 40-year-old pharmacists, and me close closer to you, and I’m not a pharmacist. Say, we’re just –

[00:07:23] TU: Coming up. It’s coming up.

[00:07:24] TB: So, if we both take a questionnaire, you could take that questionnaire and be a very savvy investor, have read up on the topic, and you can come back with a very, say, aggressive allocation for where you need to be. And I could do the same thing and come back very, very conservative. So, I could be a 50/50, you could be a 90/10. That’s risk tolerance, is basically based on our inputs in a questionnaire. For risk capacity, it does have to do with the individual itself, but it’s really about, I think, kind of where you’re at in life as well. So, in the same breath, if we’re both 40 years old, and we have 25 years left in the workforce, and we both kind of have the similar amount saved or earning potential, our risk capacity is so much higher than, say, my risk tolerance because I’m scared of the market, because I just have a longer time horizon.

So, where risk capacity is typically the lowest is right at the point of retirement. Because that is typically your longest time horizon, where you have a fixed dollar amount, i.e. your nest egg to work with. So, you just don’t have a lot of room capacity to take a lot of risk. You have to be somewhat conservative. Whereas if you have a longer time horizon, you have good earnings, a good savings, your capacity is a lot, a lot more. Maybe a convoluted way to say it, but to recap, tolerance is kind of like what you feel or like what you want to take. Risk capacity is what you can or what you should take. One of the things that often happens in this, is that those two things are not often equal. So, what we do as a third party is kind of have a conversation about this, and educate a client and sometimes that is over years, because sometimes they’ll say like, “Hey, Tim, I understand what you’re saying, but I just want to be safer.” I’ll say, “Okay, I’m going to bug you about this again.” The next time it’s like, “All right, well, my head didn’t fall off when the market went down 20%. It’s doing what it’s doing. Maybe I’ll be a little bit more aggressive.” And I think that is all the difference when it comes to long-term investing, is making sure that you are – again, you keep expenses low. We’ve talked about that numerous times with regard to your investment portfolio, but your asset allocation, which is based on your risk tolerance, and your risk capacity is set where it needs to be and then the big proponent of that.

[00:10:00] TU: Yeah, this is Tim, where I think the rubber meets the road of what we started this series on, with the nest egg calculation and looking at how much is enough, right? Because you and I could punch numbers in a calculator, or like, “Great, we need 4.2 million 3.7”, whatever the number is, but then we start to get a layer deeper. We talked about the tax advantaged accounts of how we might get there. But the next layer of which we’re getting into today is really that how are we going to invest within these types of accounts, which is the asset allocation. Which, as you just mentioned, comes down to, ultimately our risk capacity and the potential friction that may or may not be there with the risk tolerance.

So, I think that my question here, let’s lean into that situation where there’s a disconnect, where there’s a rub, where I understand what you’re saying, risk tolerance is what I’m able to stomach, risk capacity is maybe what I need to be able to do to get to that nest egg number. So, let’s say I punch in my numbers in the nest egg, they come out at $4.2 million, but then I realized, like, based on the rate of return and the level of aggressiveness that, those numbers are determined upon. I’m not comfortable with that. So, play that out. Is that a scenario where, as you just mentioned, we’re kind of working towards this and getting more comfortable in the long run? Is it adjusting down that nest egg goal? How do you begin to work through this with a client?

[00:11:20] TB: Yeah. The nest egg is a multivariate problem. So, the two defaults that I would always go to is like, if you’re not comfortable with taking more risk, and again, I would say, investing is definitely risky. Of course, it is. But what I would say over a 20 plus year time horizon is actually fairly predictable. We have enough data points that says that the US market, and again, there’s not necessarily any – it’s not past performances are indicative of future performance. But I think we’re not gambling here, we’re not speculating.

So, we’re not taking a bet all on like one stock. But I think if you’re uncomfortable with that, I think, the second thing I would say, is you have to save more though, you have to invest more. When we talked about conservative Jane versus aggressive Jane, and we kind of said, “Hey, conservative Jane, she makes $120,000. She gets 3% cost of Living raises, she saves 10%. She has a 30-year career. And then this is her nest egg.” What’s your income? What’s your cost to live? What do you actually save? And then the time horizon, 30 years. So, the other thing that you could say is like, “Okay, well, maybe we’re not retiring at 65 in 30 years. Maybe we’re retiring at 70.” So, it’s a 35-year career. And that’s the thing is like, you can always work longer. 

One of these things have to give, and that’s why I say like, the easiest thing for me, is to say like, “Look, if you’re 30, 35, 40, even 45, and you have 20 years, left until retirement, who gives a crap if the market goes down in 2022?” But, we as humans, we feel that loss, we’re like, “Man, my portfolio was $200,000 or $20,000, and now it’s $140,000 or $14,000.” You feel those losses. But again, this goes back to like what I was saying, it’s hard for us to conceptualize time, and when the market went down during the pandemic, I don’t even think about that and a lot of people freak out about that. But we know that the market is going to do this, and this is like on a podcast, I’m just waving my hand up and down like a roller coaster. But typically, it’s going in a positive trajectory. You’re just going to have some of those ups and downs.

What I would say is that, if you can stomach those ups and downs and lean more towards equities, you’re going to be better off. I think what people do is they put more bonds or fixed income in their portfolio, to smooth out those rides, even those rides are still the same. But what they do is they make themselves feel better in the near term, at the behest of like long-term performance.

So, on the other side of this, Tim, is like, if we’re talking to the pre-retiree, the person that’s going to retire in the next five years, sometimes you look at that portfolio, and it’s looking at him like, “Whoa, we’re taking way too much risk.” Because if the market does go down 40%, then we don’t have enough time to recover from that. So, it’s really indicative to like, say, “Hey, I’m glad you took risks throughout your working career. But now we got to start protecting the principal.” And this is where you probably want to be the most conservative with your portfolios is kind of that right in the eye of the storm, which is 5 to 10 years plus or minus, your retirement date. And people get that wrong, too. That’s where you almost – you’re at risk for like sequence of return risk, which means that if the market is down, say 20%, 30%, 40%, and then you’re taking 40 or 50 grand out of your portfolio to live on, the failure rate, meaning you’re going to run out of money is so much higher than anything that you could be doing leading up to that.

So, it’s really, really important to know where you are in space and time, and ensure that your portfolio is positioned in a way that’s going to, one, get the best returns, but also protect you. For a lot of us, it’s kind of not knowing. And I would say it’s one of the major missteps that I see, looking at people’s portfolios is a misalignment of that.

[00:15:31] TU: Yeah. Tim, one of the things I’m sensing, at least anecdotally, and talking with pharmacists, about this in various settings, is that the mid-career pharmacist, so I’m thinking about the group that is maybe 10 to 25 years into their career, they’re not yet feeling the retirement date right around the corner, but they’re certainly past kind of the early part of their career. I think there’s a real risk here, as you highlighted. Some of the limitations of the rule of thumb, to get too conservative too early. And I think, in this moment, we’re in a period of volatility right now in the markets. And depending on when people graduated and started investing, this might be the real first significant downturn that they’re feeling in the market, right? You look at even some of the start of the pandemic. That was very short lived. It was significant, to drop. But it was pretty abrupt and recovered quickly.

So, I think this is really – I graduated in 2008. I’ve talked about this on the show before. This is the real first test for me in my portfolio to say, “All right, am I really adhering to my asset allocation plan and what I need to be doing, and the rub potentially the tolerance capacity.” And I think it’s different than a new practitioner, because you have worked hard for 10 or 15 years, you have built up several $100,000 or more of savings, and you’re looking at this saying, “Man, this hurts in the moment.” But if we’re looking 20, 30 years into the future, as you said, over and over again on the show, the worst thing we can do is buy high and sell low. So, the third party here, I think, it’d be really helpful making sure we have a plan to kind of weather the storms. But I specifically am thinking about that mid-career group right now, in this period we’re in of volatility, and they’ve done hard work, they’ve built up some savings, and this might be the first test, of that happening.

[00:17:12] TB: Yeah, I mean, and when those numbers get bigger, you feel that even more, right? I’m human. When I do catch a glance at my portfolio, I’m like, “Oh, is this really?” But I had to step back and look at the long term. I almost have to like detach myself emotionally from it. Because what happens, and I say this all the time is like, when the market just does this, and it’s just a downward plunge, your first reaction is you want to take your investment ball and go home. You don’t want to play anymore. Oftentimes I say, is like, you want to do the exact opposite of how you feel. So, that’s when I reassure myself and I say, “Hey, Tim, you know what, you are putting in x amount of dollars into your 401(k) at every pay period. And now, what you’re buying with those dollars is going. It sets the dollar cost averaging.” So, when it’s up, I’m not buying as many shares, but I’m still like, patting myself on the back, because I’m like, “Yeah, my portfolio is up.” But when it’s down, I have to basically say, “Look, if I’m putting money into my portfolio systematically, on a recurrent basis, which is typically what people do in their 401(k), your dollars are just going farther.” So, then when it does rebound, you’re going to see that impact even more.

So, it is one of those things where it’s, again, it’s not getting caught up in the moment, and it is really looking at the long term. But when you hear the news, or you hear other people talking and there are things that – it gives you pause, and you start to doubt yourself. But I think at the end of the day, what I always say to myself is like I trust the market. I trust what the data has showed. Again, maybe it’s not always going to be 10% when you just sit down for inflation, it’s 6.87%. But always not be that. And sometimes people go to the catastrophic thing. I’m like, “Then we have other problems to worry about, if that’s the case.”

I really believe that, if you look at all this all the things, whether it’s you can make more money, and then potentially save more or you can work longer. To me, the easiest thing to do is to kind of like surrender yourself to the market and say, “Look” – to your point, Tim, like the rule of thumb, it’s this gradual, and I have – I’ll share the camera here, which I’ll be on the video, but this is like a really terrible sketch. Because I was trying to like sketch this out conceptually, because I’ve never showed this. I’m a visual learner. In the rule of thumb, it has you go in and say like, “Okay, if you’re 30, then how do you start in 80% equities?” And then when you go to 40, you’re at 70%. In my mind, I’m like, “No.” Hell to the no. Because it’s just so much lost opportunity.

Whereas mine is more like, my belief and this is more of a capacity thing, is more of a cliff. So, you should be very much mostly equities, and there’s a lot of criticism against an equity portfolio. And again, this is not investment advice. This is not investment advice. But it should be typically closer to the equity or equity portfolio. And then when you get close to that eye of the storm, that’s when you start to basically divest out of equities, and go more to the fixed income, the bonds, and then you go through that eye of the storm where you’re here, and then you start to gradually, as you get to 75, 80, and you’re really looking for combating its longevity risk, which is the fear of the money running out. You need that to last into your 90s, 100, that type of thing. So, you’re going to take more risks on the back end, but typically, you have a more of a handle on spending, and things like that, post eye of the storm time.

So yeah, I mean, no matter where you’re at in life, this is an important conversation to have. And there is no right answer. But I would say that there are wrong answers in my estimation. But I also think it’s important to say that, at the end of the day, we say this about student loans, but at the end of the day, if you’re like waking up and you’re like sweating bullets, because you’re worried about how your investments are faring, especially in a volatile market, then we talk about this with the emergency fund, it’s just not worth that.

[00:21:20] TU: But, something’s got to give.

[00:21:21] TB: Something’s got to give. That means you either have to save more or work longer, and there’s a lot of –

[00:21:27] TU: Spend less.

[00:21:28] TB: Spend less, yeah, which, which is really hard. That’s the one I didn’t mention, because that’s really, really hard to do, for most people. And I think I said on a previous episode, some people look at a 60% to 80% of their income, and that’s basically what they need is. Some advisors just look at what the tax return says, and if you’ve earned $180,000, leading up to retirement, that’s what they plan for, because that’s basically the money that’s flowing through. So, there’s lots of different ways to kind of look at that as well.

[00:21:59] TU: Tim, I think one of the interesting things here is for folks, again, I mentioned the self-awareness thing. I think they really dig deeper about like, where might these beliefs come from. Wherever you are, on kind of the risk tolerance, what you’re able to stomach scale. You mentioned earlier in the show, some folks might be like, “Hey, I’m scared of market. I’ve heard that multiple times. I have no interest kind of investing in the market. Don’t trust it. Not comfortable with the risk, whatever the case may be.” And then there’s obviously the other end of the spectrum, which is like, I’m all in on whatever investment strategy could be equities, could be cryptocurrency, could be real estate, could be a combination of things. I don’t even feel the risk. It’s like, “Man, you could have two people at the same point in their journey, and are just dichotomously in very, very different directions.”

I’m just curious from your life experiences working with clients, is that coming from some of the money scripts and things that were growing up in? Is that coming from experiences like, “Hey, I lived through the 2008 recession. I saw my parents lose a significant amount of their nest egg or grandparent”, whatever be the case. Obviously, the pandemic could have an impact. Where does that come from?

[00:23:13] TB: I think it’s a combination of all those things. I mean, you even look at it, the Great Depression, that generation didn’t put money in banks, because they just didn’t trust banks, and then that can kind of filter through later generations. I think it’s a combination of, kind of your – I think your upbringing, like I would – I talked to my parents, and they’re older now, but even when younger, I think, my mom opened up a Roth IRA for me when I was really, really young, but I think it was like, mainly in cash, or like, very, very conservative bonds, or something like that, that we actually invested in which , again, doesn’t really make any sense if it’s going to be used for 14-year-old in retirement, 50 years later or 60 years later.

So, I think it is a lack of understanding and kind of, I think, a lack of education, or financial literacy around investments is part of it. That’s not anyone’s fault. I just think it should be more part of the curriculum and the things that we talk about as students in grade school, in high school. And again, we kind of talked about you can take out hundreds of thousands of loans, but not really not understand like the financial implications of that. So, I think we need to do a better job of that. I think, again, to go back to my own experience, Tim, we didn’t talk about money growing up. It was very much a taboo thing. So, it was kind of just something that was hands off, which I think kind of does lead to stunted growth in that regard. I think that a more openness to kind of talk through some of these things, and some of like the head trash, I think, a lot of it goes – it does come from your experience. I think there is a curiosity for a lot of people and we see it, where we kind of talked about maybe some missed prioritization of like, you’re invested in penny stocks or individual stocks, but you’re not necessarily taking your match for 401(k) or you have zero emergency fund.

I don’t hate on that too much, because I think it’s someone’s willingness to kind of learn and understand, like how markets work, right? I’ve been in that boat. But I think over time is like, the market is very, very humbling, where you – it’s almost like going to the casino. No one ever says, like, “Oh, man, I lost all this money.” It was like, “I had a great” – those things get lost in the fold. I think that over time, I think people’s experience with the market is, even professional. I just read a headline somewhere that Warren Buffett says, like a monkey could pick stocks better than most financial advisors, which I would agree with. Because there is a lot of randomness with that. So, it’s, again, buy the market, don’t try to beat the market.

I think it’s a little bit of that. It’s experience, it’s education. So, people that are nerds about this, that read up, I think kind of understand what to do. But I think a lot of it is the fingerprints of what our families put on us, and sometimes those things are overcomeable, and we are aware of those things, and sometimes they’re not. Sometimes it takes someone to say, “Maybe we need to look at this a different way.” Because if you want to get to where you need to go, and for a lot of pharmacists, especially if they’re a lot of pharmacists out there, they might be the first person in their family to have graduated from college. They might be the first person that make a six-figure income.

So, with that, comes, I think, a different set of issues and things to think about as you’re – because, again, typically, the higher you are on the income scale, we look at like Social Security, less of your retirement paycheck is coming for security. The lower you are on the income, the majority of your paycheck is going to come from security. So, you just have a different set of issues and things to think about, as you make more money and have that paycheck. So, I think it’s all of those things that can shape your money script, the things that you’re saying to yourself, but I think it also is even deeper than that. It’s kind of the caveman, cavewoman approaches like you don’t want losses, right? So, you want to protect yourself in any way that you can to shield yourself from those losses. So, we do sometimes irrational things just to protect that pain. I think that’s just in our DNA. We’re here today because our ancestors have survived, some didn’t. But as the evolution of sorts is that you are programmed to do things that maybe don’t necessarily make sense in here now.

[00:27:45] TU: Tim, that’s so true. I think it’s human behaviors, you mentioned. But as you’re talking, I can and always will, I think vividly remember the significant losses in my portfolio. You feel more in the moment, but I don’t remember the significant gains in my portfolio. The long-term trend is up in a positive direction, and the significant ups have been bigger than or equal to some of the significant downs. But I don’t remember those. Like I do the losses.

Let’s wrap up this third part of our retirement planning series by connecting all of this to the asset allocation plan. So, what we determined we need is the nest egg. We talked about that in the first episode. What our risk tolerance or capacity is, those two things combined is going to then help us inform what our asset allocation plan is. So, how we actually are going to distribute these dollars within the accounts, the various alphabet soup of accounts we talked about in the last episode. So, what is asset allocation, Tim? Just to find that a little bit further, and then what are the main variables. We’ve obviously talked about one in terms of the risk, but other variables that can impact our asset allocation plan?

[00:28:51] TB: Yeah, so the asset allocation is basically the art, or you can say, even the science of construction of portfolio with a mix of stocks and bonds to achieve the most amount of return for the least amount of risk. That’s what you’re really trying to do. So, at a very strategic level, there’s basically two buckets or two asset classes. There are stocks, which are basically where you own an equity share and a company, and you’re afforded things like dividends and capital appreciation. These are the things that we need to outpace things like the inflation monster, the tax man, et cetera. And then the second part of the portfolio are bonds or fixed incomes, and these are typically IOUs or notes that say, “Hey, government, I’m going to lend you the money.” Or, “Hey, corporation, I’m going to lend you my money. Give it back to me sometime in the future, but give me an interest payment as we go.”

Between the two, typically, bonds are more like a linear growth. Stocks are more exponential growth, but there’s typically more risk with stocks and less versus with bonds. That’s asset allocation in a nutshell. And then what you could do is, you can kind of go more granular in terms of like, “Okay, well, if I have this” – if 80% of my portfolio is going to equities or stocks, you can divide that up between things like large cap, mid cap, small cap, international, emerging market, real estate, that type of thing. And then same thing with bonds, if 20% of your portfolio is going to bonds, you can divide that up between junk bonds or international bonds or short duration bonds, long duration bonds, government bonds, that type of thing.

So, it is more granular. But at a very high level, to tie risk to asset allocation is, either using the rule of thumb, or using some type of risk tolerance, gauge or questionnaire, you can say, “Okay, I’m going to answer these questions. It’s going to say I’m an 80/20 portfolio, maybe a more balanced 60/40 portfolio.” And with that, if you have kind of an unexamined, approach, meaning like, most of the time, I think a lot of people will take that, and that’s how they invest. And I think, what we, as an advisor would do is say, let’s say, “I’m you’re 35, I know what saying you’re at an 80/20. But here are some numbers to show you that you should probably should be more aggressive.” We’re not going to spend this portfolio for another 30 years. Who cares what it does for the next 20, for the next 10, whatever that is. But let’s take a little bit more aggressive. 

So, that’s where you kind of get that talk about risk capacity. And then what you do is say you say, “Okay, we’ll compromise. We’re going to like a 90/10.” Then essentially, if you have $100,000, we’ll just say you’re a government employee with a TSP, if you have 100,000, know that 90,000 is going to go into some type of equity portfolio. So, the big one in TSP would be the C fund, which mimics the S&P 500. And then 10%, would go into the bond fund. That’s basically it. That’s where you connect the risk of where you’re at which again, is partly derived from the things that we just talked about, your upbringing, the head trash that you have, your experience. If you’ve experienced any pain, et cetera. And then, it should be then examined from where you’re at in terms of your time horizon, what you have saved. You’re working with an advisor, obviously. If you don’t have experience, you have a little bit more cred there to come up with, you know, what your final number is for your asset allocation. And then you put that into practice.

And then the idea is that over the course of a year, five years, 10 years, that portfolio is going to drift. So, say you are at 90/10, it could drift to a 95/5. It could drift down to an 80/20 or an 85/15, and you really want to make sure that you rebalance that over time. Because if you don’t, then if you’re an 80/20 portfolio, and you drift to something like a 90/10, if the market was then to go into a spiral, you’re taking more risk than what you signed up initially. So, sometimes when I say to rebalance, it just means to basically lock your percentages back to what you originally had agreed upon with your advisor or with yourself. That’s the big thing. So, you are kind of just resetting the percentages.

[00:33:12] TU: Again, this is a really important connection, as we bring this all together and talk about the value of a third party and the value of a planner that can really help your –it’s not – the value is not coming from picking stocks or picking investments that are going to beat the market. We’ve established that, what you’re describing is more passive investing strategy and here, we’re just talking about investing, which again, is just one part of the financial plan. The value really comes from okay, what is the game plan? What is the life plan? What is a wealthy life look like now? What is retirement life look like? What’s the number for us to get there? What does that mean today? How much do we need to be saving today to get there? We talked about that, in the first part of the series. What accounts are we going to leverage? How do we optimize this tax strategy? And within there, how do we begin to pick the investments, rebalance those portfolios over time.

Again, just such an important reminder, there are a lot of nuances in there alone, but investing is one part of the financial plan. So, we need to take that step back out of this silo that we’re in retirement planning and say, “Okay, what else is going on? What are all the other aspects of the financial plan that are happening? And does that impact or does that change potentially how we’re going to approach our investing plan?” I think, sometimes, we can hear this and hear the passive investing strategy. We can hear the nest egg calculators and think like, I can do that, I’ll just rebalance every once in a while. And you certainly can do it yourself. But let’s not lose sight of what can happen when you bring a third party into the equation, and we also have some value in zooming out and making sure this is fitting in correctly with the rest of the financial plan and the other puzzle pieces that are involved.

[00:34:56] TB: Yeah, the act of investment is a necessary, I don’t want to say evil, but it’s a necessary thing that we need to do to, again, get in front of things like inflation and taxes. A lot of advisors make that the central part of their practice and it is important. I don’t want to say it’s not important. But it typically takes a backseat to a lot of the other things that are going on in life, whether that is, “Hey, I need to pull money out of this investment, because we have to put an additional on our house, because I’m taking care of an aging parent.” Or, “Hey, we have a kid that’s going to college. So, we need to, again, change some things around.” Or, “Hey, I lost my job, so I’m not going to be able to invest like I was.”

The thing with a financial plan is that, the value is more in planning, not the plan. And the investment piece is very important, and it can be as complicated as you want to make it. But even in the simplest version, it can be complicated, because again, if we’re talking about an asset allocation, the example that I gave is in a TSP, but if you’re trying to do that across a brokerage account, an IRA, a Roth IRA, some of the task, it can very quickly, when you add layers, get more and more complicated. But I think that the – yeah, the value, I think, with working and this is at any part of the financial plan, not just the investments. It’s almost like an am I crazy type of – am I crazy to be doing this? Should I give myself permission to do this? And sometimes, because of the environment or the way that we live today with social media, like there’s so much gaslighting. You can almost start to doubt your own judgment. So, it’s sometimes good to have a rock or a steady influence, and this is at, really, any part of your life, but I think finance is what we’re talking about here to just say like, “Hey, am I crazy? Or what do we do here? Or this is a variable or this is a bump in the road? Or this is an opportunity, like what’s the best way to proceed?” Again, super biased. But I think that’s really the value. It’s not necessarily saying like, “Hey, we’re going to beat the market and all that nonsense. It’s like, life has happening, and are we living a wealthy life or not?

[00:37:20] TU: Yeah. And so, to that point, whether you are a new practitioner listening, early on in this journey of saving for the future, mid-career pharmacists wondering, “Hey, am I on track? Are there other things I should be thinking about? How does this fit in with other goals that I’m working towards? Or, pre-retiree, retiree thinking about more the distribution stage and building that retirement paycheck, which we’re going to talk about on our fourth and final part of the series. Regardless of where you’re at in the financial journey, our fee only financial planning team of five certified financial planners, in-house tax team that includes a CPA and an IRS enrolled agent. They’re ready to work with you to build your retirement plan, among work with you on your other financial goals.

So, you can book a free discovery call, learn more about our one on one financial planning services that is customized for the pharmacy professional. You can book that call at yfpplanning.com. Again, that’s yfpplanning.com. Thanks for listening and have a great rest of the week.

[OUTRO]

[00:38:09] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer.

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 273: Alphabet Soup of Retirement Accounts (Retirement Planning)


Alphabet Soup of Retirement Accounts (Retirement Planning)

On this episode, sponsored by Insuring Income, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, for the second part of the four-part series on retirement planning. Together they discuss the alphabet soup of retirement accounts including commonly used vehicles for accruing a nest egg. 

Episode Summary

YFP Co-founders Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®,  discuss the alphabet soup of retirement accounts in this episode, the second part of the four-part series on retirement planning. Tim and Tim know that planning for retirement and building a nest egg can be overwhelming with so much to consider. In this episode, they break down common vehicles for building a nest egg into two main buckets. Tim Baker differentiates between tax-advantaged accounts administered by the employer and those administered by the individual. Tim and Tim spend time discussing how each tax-advantaged account works, including the contribution limits, catch-up provisions, and phase-outs where applicable. They get specific on how not all “buckets” are equal in terms of what you, as the investor or retiree, will receive. Due to the nature of retirement accounts and their relationship to the financial and tax plans, Tim and Tim share the importance of marrying the retirement plan to tax planning for the most benefit to the investor. Lastly, Tim and Tim explain that there are many factors to consider when determining the priority of saving among different tax-advantaged accounts, reference resources for listeners on prioritizing investments, and mention the services provided by YFP Planning and the YFP Tax team for pharmacists. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here. Thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I continue with the second of our four-part series on retirement planning. Last week on Episode 272, we discuss, determining how much is enough for retirement. This week, we take a step forward by talking about the alphabet soup of retirement accounts including commonly used vehicles when occurring a nest egg. Highlights from the show include differentiating tax advantaged accounts into those that are administered by the employer, and those that are administered by you the individual, how each tax advantaged account works, including contribution limits and ketchup provisions, and why not all buckets are created equal, and factors to consider when determining the priority of saving among different tax advantaged retirement accounts. 

Now before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 270 households in 40 plus states. YFP Planning offers fi only, high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning, financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, and then a jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:01:39] TU: This week’s podcast episode is brought to you by Insuring Income. Insuring Income is your source for all things term, life insurance and own occupation, disability Insurance. Insuring Income has a relationship with America’s top rated term Life Insurance and Disability Insurance Company, so pharmacists like you, can easily find the best solutions for your personal situation. To better serve you, Insuring Income reviews all applicable carriers in the marketplace for your desired coverage. Supports clients in all 50 states and make sure all of your questions get answered. 

To get quotes and apply for term life or disability insurance, see sample contracts from disability carriers or learn more about these topics. Visit insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist. Again that’s insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist.

[INTERVIEW]

[00:02:31] TU: Tim Baker, welcome back.

[00:02:33] TB: Yeah, good to be back, Tim. Looking forward to part two of this series. 

[00:02:37] TU: Yes, this is our second part of the four part series we’re doing on retirement planning. Last week, we talked about, How to Determine How Much is Enough? We ran through some mistakes scenarios and calculations to determine that number. This week, we’re going to start to get into more of the X’s and O’s on how to get there. As I mentioned, as we wrapped up last week’s episode, often when we begin to wrap our mind around, okay, this 3 million, this 4 million, this 5 million number and we begin to accept what that is and what we need to be saving each month to get there. 

The next natural question is, all right, where do I actually invest the money? What are the vehicles and options that are available? That’s what we’re going to talk about this week, some of the variety of investment vehicles and we’re primarily going to focus on tax advantaged retirement accounts, but certainly acknowledge that there are a variety of ways to build a nest egg outside of just the accounts that we’re going to talk about. So that could be real estate, that could be digital currency and assets, business ownership collectibles, and knowing many individuals are building a base that comes from, maybe not exclusively includes, but comes from traditional retirement accounts. We’re going to focus our time there. 

Another important distinction I want to make is that for our small business owners that are listening, we know there are several you out there. We will cover not in detail on this episode, but certainly there are other options from a business standpoint, SEP IRA, simple IRA, solo 401K. We’re not going to focus on those in this episode, but certainly, those are a valuable option to get us to our goal, as well. 

Tim, we throw these terms around all the time in pharmacy as notorious for throwing around acronyms. We put together pharmacy and financial planning. I feel like it gets worse. So we throw around term 401K, 457, TSPs, traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, HSAs. This is often when we’re speaking with a group of pharmacists where we start to see the eyes gloss over. Okay, I understand there’s options I need to take advantage of, especially from a tax standpoint, but there’s a lot to consider, this can be overwhelming. We’re going to break this down into two buckets to give ourselves a framework. 

Those tax advantage accounts that are administered by the employer. Then the second bucket is those tax advantage accounts that are administered by you as the individual. So this distinction I think will help us begin to organize and have a framework for how we can think about different options that we have to save. Tim, let’s start with the accounts that are administered by the employer. Give us a rundown of the accounts that are available here and some of the distinctions between them.

[00:05:10] TB: The ones that are typically administered by the employer are going to be the 401K, the 403B, the TSP, those are the three primary ones. Then sometimes you run into things like the 457 plan, which is typically a bonus plan. Sometimes you see 401As, which are like 401Ks, except the participants aren’t making contributions to them. The one that we’ll talk about, synonymous with all the other ones is a 401K. The 401K, is the most popular profit sharing plan. Essentially, how it works is when you are hired by an employer. They’re going to say, “Hey, welcome to the team. As part of a benefit to working on our team, we have this 401K that we’ve set up through fidelity or whatever, whoever the custodian is. These basically are funded through salary deferrals from your paycheck.” 

Back in the day, you had to basically make that election yourself, but the Obama administration, I think, smartly made it, so you have to opt out. A lot of these plans, now you’re auto enrolled at a certain percentage into the plan, I think, based on your age into a target date fund. The backdrop of this, Tim is back in the day, when our dads were starting the career, the most prevalent retirement plan was a defined benefit plan, a pension. What happened over really started in the 80s and 90s, employers were starting to see how big of a burden that was on their own balance sheets, because they were basically carrying the lion’s share of saving for the employees retirement. The 401k was introduced, which is a defined contribution plan and that means that that risk of having enough save for retirement has shifted from the employer to the employee. 

Now it is up to the employee to figure out how much they need to be different from their paycheck, where to invest it, and then how to distribute it tax efficiently in retirement. The problem is that we just aren’t necessarily good at that. The 401K has really taken off and now defined contributions will outpace pensions, as many of us know that do not have pensions. Participants make elective salary deferrals and for anything that doesn’t have Roth in front of it, contributions are not tax until they’re withdrawn. What this means is that, I’m a pharmacist, and I’m making $120,000 a year, and I put 20,000, just for round numbers, the maximum you can put in is 20,500, but let’s say, I put $20,000 into my 401K. The IRS taxes me as if I made $100,000. It goes in pre-tax. 

Now the money is actually, it’s only going to be taxed either going in or going out. That traditional 401K, that $100,000 is going to grow and grow and grow. Then when we pour it out in retirement, that’s when it’s going to be taxed. If we think about this, say I’m going to 25% tax bracket at age, we’ll say 40, it’s not taxed at 25%. It goes in tax free. Now let’s say I’m at age 65, I’m retiring. I’m at a 25% tax bracket. If that $100,000, let’s say, it grows, but that’s going to be taxed at 25%. Your benefit, there’s really no benefit either way. The benefit comes if your tax bracket is actually lower. If you’re at a 20% tax bracket, that’s when you see some of the statements. That’s for the traditional. Now if you are age 50 and older, Tim you can make a $6,500 catch up. 

Now all of these things are the same for a 403B, which is typically 401K you typically see for profit 403B, you typically see for a non-profit or hospital that type of thing. The 403B has an additional catch up and it says typically if you are a certain age and you have a certain years of service, you can put in as typically 15 years you can put an additional $3,000. So you get your 20,500 Plus the 6,500 regular catch up plus another 3000. So that’s just a funky thing with 403Bs. TSPs are very similar to all of them they have the catch-up, not like a 403B, but a regular catch-up. Their matches the same across, so TSPs is the Thrift Savings Plan, typically for military government workers, their match is 5%. The big benefit for the TSP is that they’re in basically five funds that are super low costs, which is not necessarily the case with the 401K or the 403B. 

The appropriate use for these, Tim are typically when If the employer wants to provide a quality retirement benefit, without being required to make ongoing employee contributions. So you can have, you can have an employer that offers a 401K, but doesn’t put any match or anything into it, that’s up to the employer to do that. A lot of employers are doing this to incentivize their employees to save, but also as a retention, because you can have vesting schedules attached to it, which means if you leave after a certain amount of time, you don’t get that match. It’s a great vehicle if you have a young workforce, because you can accumulate savings over a long period of time. But the basically the risk is on the employee to do what they need to do to get to have an adequate retirement.

A lot of 401Ks allow for insert with withdrawals for hardships, you can take loans against it. Most 401K’s these days, same thing with the TSP and the and the 403B have a Roth component. The big disadvantage here, Tim, is that oftentimes a 401K can be expensive. So typically, the rule of thumb is, the smaller the employer, the more expensive the 401K is to that individual participant. I’ve seen it, where all in cost on a 401K is almost 2%. So think of that, I have $100,000 in a 401K, $2,000 per years coming out either to pay an advisor expense ratio or things like that. Whereas something a TSP, it’s like, three basis points, which is $30, compared to 2000. 

Then the other disadvantage is that, it’s not going to guarantee an adequate retirement benefit as a pension would. Oftentimes, again, smaller 401K is the investment selection won’t be great. That’s the main one. Again, all of those, the TSP, the 403B are going to be very, very similar to that without with some minor nuance. The 457 plan, which some people will see is a non-qualified tax advantage, deferred compensation retirement plan. This is typically for people who work in state government, local government, even some nonprofits. This is often another bucket that you can put up to $20,500 into. It’s the same thing they’re typically not taxed until it was withdrawn, but often those are available to the creditors of that. If you work for a local government that goes bankrupt, then you could potentially lose that money, which is problematic. That’s a big thing that some people will see as a 457. So typically, work on the 401K, the 403B first and look at a 457 after you’re maxing that out already.

[00:12:37] TU: Tim, correct me if I’m wrong. When I was at one university, we had the 457 available with a 403B and a 401A, but the 457 amounts was on top of in addition to –

[00:12:49] TB: Correct. Completely separate bucket, yeah. Sometimes we get that – we’re going to talk about those administered at individual levels, some people say, “Well, if I put 20,500 into my 401K, can I also put money into an IRA?” So they’re separate buckets, just like the 457 is a separate bucket that’s available to you.

[00:13:07] TU: Great synopsis. That was covering our first bucket, which is those that are administered by the employer, as Tim articulated, really looking at those interchangeable 401K, 403B, TSP, typically for profit, not for profit, those that work for a federal government agency organization. He talked about the contribution limits per years, some of the catch-up provisions after the age of 50. Then the additional one for the 403B. Then making sure we’re not confusing, a Roth 401K, Roth 403B with a Roth IRA, which we’ll talk about here in a moment. I think as we see the Roth employer sponsored accounts grow in popularity, there’s some confusion among okay, I’m contributing to a Roth 401K, can I also contribute to a Roth IRA? 

The answer to that is yes, there are some considerations there, but totally separate. One administer by the employer when administered by the individual. Let’s shift gears, Tim to that second bucket. Those administered by the individual. Two, subcategories here that I want to talk about would be the IRA accounts, both the traditional and the Roth IRA. Then the second would be an individual that wants to invest in a brokerage accounts. Let’s start with the IRAs differentiate the traditional IRA, the Roth IRA, some of the income limits and considerations for pharmacists that would contribute here.

[00:14:22] TB: Yeah. So same thing, when you see traditional or no precursor at all just IRA, you’re going to think pre-tax, when you see something Roth, you’re going to think after tax. The traditional IRA is a retirement account. It’s the traditional individual retirement account. It is an account that you either set up yourself so you go to something like Fidelity, a Vanguard, TD Ameritrade, a Betterment and you basically open it up or you can work with an advisor and they’ll basically open one up to advise for your benefit. 

The traditional IRA is funded with pre-taxed dollars. Again, this is a separate bucket away from the 401KL, the TSP, etc. you can contribute up to $6,000 per year, plus $1,000 per year catch up if you’re age 50 or older. Now, anybody essentially with earned income can contribute to a traditional IRA. It’s subject to phase out deductions. So what does that mean? If you are a single individual, and you make anywhere from 68,000, to $78,000 like AGI Adjusted Gross Income, then once you get to $78,001, you can no longer take a deduction for your IRA. I’ll give you example on the other side, so if you make less than $68,000, so $67,999, you can deduct 100% of your say $6,000 deduction or contribution. It phases out, which means that once you get to that midpoint, so 68,000, to 78,000 the midpoint is 73,000. 

If you put $6,000 in you can deduct 3000, but then you can’t, which is half of it and you can’t deduct the other 3000. This is really good for people that are listening to the podcasts that might be fellows or residents or maybe they’re in school, and they’re working and they’re trying to save some for retirement, typically, pharmacists are not going to be allowed to make a deductible contribution. So just to give you an example, if I’m out there, and I make $60,000, which is below that, and I’m single, and I make below that threshold, and I put $6,000 into my traditional IRA. The government, the IRS looks at me as if I made 54,000. So similar example, as I used before. 

Now, the difference between the IRA and the 401K is the 401K is coming out of your paycheck. It’s not basically hitting your bank account. This is typically funded where it hits your bank account and you’re technically contributed into that with after tax dollars, but you’re just deducting it on your 1040 when you go to file. That’s a little bit of the nuance. The phase out, if you’re married filing jointly is 109 to 129, which again, typically for a lot of pharmacists if they’re dual income, they’re going to be above that that threshold. The same thing as, so that $6,000 goes in pre-tax, it gets invested, it grows tax free. Then when we pour that out in retirement, when we withdraw it in retirement, that’s when it’s taxed. Again, it’s either tax going in or going out. 

The Roth is the one that’s tax going in. The Roth IRA is an account that’s fun it with after tax dollars and it stays after taxes. You’re not going to take a deduction. So basically, it’s the same thing, you can contribute up to $6,000 plus $1,000 after age 50. Now, and this is an aggregate, if you were to contribute $4,000 a year to your traditional you can only contribute $2,000 to your your Roth IRA. This is subjected to phase outs to actually contribute. So what that means is that once you make as a single person, once you make the phase out is 129 to 144,000. Tim, once you make $144,001 the door slams shut, and you can no longer make a contribution to the Roth IRA. For married filing jointly that ranges 204,000 to 214,000. So if you’re a couple and you make more than 214,000, you can’t directly put money into the Roth IRA, which then gets into that, you fund a traditional IRA, you got to go through all those rules that we talked about and then you can do a backdoor Roth IRA, again easier to explain, harder in actual concept. 

To just reiterate, if I make, we’ll use the same example. Let’s say I make $60,000. I put $6,000 into a Roth IRA. Now, the government looks at me as if I made $60,000 that $6,000 that goes in, it grows tax free. Then when I pour it out in retirement, because it’s already been taxed, that $6,000 is all mine, or whatever it grows to. That’s the big thing that we often talk about is like, if you have a million dollars in your traditional IRA at the end of the rainbow, when you’re going to retire, you don’t have a million dollars. If you’re in a 25% tax bracket, you actually have $750,000 and the government has 250,000. If there’s a million dollars in a Roth IRA or Roth TSP or a Roth 401K, that money is yours. That’s super important to remember. I think I hit everything with Roth.

[00:19:34] TU: Yeah. Then again, Tim, just to zoom out for a moment so in the first segment, we talked about the big security number, what do we need at the end of the rainbow at the nest like three, $4 million. We back that into, okay, what do we need to be saving per month based on a set of assumptions, asset allocation, risk tolerance, all those things? Maybe that number is 800 1200, 1500, whatever it is per month. Now we’re talking about where does that go, right? So we started with employer counts. Is that a 401K, for profit 403, not for profit TSP federal government? Or and or are there individual options, traditional, perhaps maybe not a deductible option there for many pharmacists based on income or a direct Roth or backdoor Roth, depending on income limits for pharmacists. 

If you put these two together, and where we see many pharmacists beginning to build their foundation, again, not the only place that we’re going to be investing 20,500, certainly more than that, for those that are listening, that are in that catch up age, older than 50. Then on the individual side $6,000 per year, so 26,500 per year between the two of those and that 20,500, Tim is not including any employer match as well, right? That’s employee –

[00:20:46] TB: Yeah. If you include the employer match, and anything else they give you, I think the number can go all the way up to 61,000. As long as the employee and the employer match doesn’t exceed, 61,000 you’re good to go, which that’d be nice if you got that much in a match.

 [00:21:02] TU: We put the two of these together. Again, not investment advice, but we put the two of these together, and we’re now north of $2,000 per month towards our savings goal. Is this the only way we can invest? Absolutely not, but these two tax advantage accounts, and there’s a lot of strategy and consideration here. Tim, you mentioned it a few moments ago, tax bracket today, tax brackets in the future, what else is going on in terms of the tax situation, another great example where we need to marry the tax plan with the financial plan, but a really good place to begin to think about the foundation for our investing.

[00:21:33] TB: Yeah. That’s a common question that we have, is like, should we put in Roth, we put it in traditional, should we be putting it in taxable, which we haven’t talked about, the brokerage account, which we can talk about here in a sec. The answer is yes, all of them. Because what we do when we try to build a retirement paycheck, we’re trying to get that money out of those tax advantaged accounts at the lowest tax rate possible. The other thing at the sprinkle in is oftentimes what use the brokerage account for, so often you use a brokerage account for an early retirement or to delay claiming Social Security as long as possible. So you increase that percentage of a known income stream from the government that’s inflation protected, and that is a bigger part of your percentage of income, that’s huge and a lot of people will not do that correctly. 

Before we get to the Brokerage account, the last thing I’ll say about all these accounts that we talked about, so far, the 401K, TSP 403B, Roth traditional IRA, the other one that’s often synonymous with a traditional IRA is a rollover IRA, that’s typically, when you’ll see that’s also pre-tax. Worth mentioning for all of these accounts is that if you take non-qualified withdrawals, which that’s typically when you take money out before you’re 59 and a half years old, you’re subject to a 10% penalty along with paying the tax. That’s basically discouraging you to rob that account for a car, or a home downpayment or things like that. There’s exceptions to that rule, but that 10% penalty it’s a good way for you to keep that money in there. 

Again, we talked about gratification, sometimes it’s really hard for us to lock that money away and not use it until the future. So the brokerage account, Tim, is the last account that we can talk about, and the brokerage account is, it’s a taxable account. It’s an account that you can set up through any of those custodians that I mentioned. It’s funded using after tax dollars. This can either be set up as an individual account, so in your name, just like all your retirement accounts or a joint account with a spouse or a partner. The contributions to this are unlimited. With all these other accounts, we’re saying, “Oh, you can only put $20,000, 500 or $6,000.” Here’s have at it, if you if you get an inheritance, or you’re maxing everything out, and you can put five grand a month or whatever into an account, you can do that. 

You typically use this when you’ve exhausted your retirement contributions previously mentioned. The other one that we of course, always mentioned is the HSA, it’s another bucket, that’s good. You typically use this account when you’ve exhausted those things or if you’re doing something else like, we often use this account for a tax bomb for a non-PSLF strategy. It could be for something that –

[00:24:23] TU: Early retirement. 

[00:24:24] TB: Yeah. It could be something that’s an early retirement. So if I’m going to retire at age 55 and I’m not going to be, I can’t collect on my other accounts until I’m age 59 and a half, you would use it for that or if you’re saying okay, I’m going to retire it 62 or 65. I’m going to delay to claim Social Security to age 70. I’ll use that account from that as well. Those are typically or the last one, which is not necessarily retirement related. You might say, “Hey, Tim, I want to basically buy a piece of real estate investment in 10 years.” I’m like, “Well, that’s probably long enough time horizon where we probably should do something other than a CD or high yield savings account.” So let’s build a balanced portfolio or something along those lines that we can get a little bit more return for a little bit more risk. 

The advantage to the brokerage account is the greatest flexibility, there’s no penalty to withdraw, as I mentioned from the other accounts do, you can recognize losses to offset gains, that’s called tax loss harvesting. That’s one of the big disadvantages that when you put in will use the $6,000. Tim, I put $6,000 into my Roth account or my traditional. When we say it grows tax free, what that means is when you buy mutual fund ABC at $100 per share, when you sell it and withdraw the account and say it’s $300 per share in the future, there is a gain of $200 for that investment. 

Inside of a Roth inside of a Roth IRA, a 401K, a traditional IRA, you don’t have to pay tax on that $200 per share gain, in a taxable or a brokerage account you do so what that means is that you’ve contributed after tax dollars, you made the investment, you have a 200 per share gain, you have to pay either long term capital gains on that, which is typically 0%, 15%, or 20%, most pharmacists are probably going to be in the 15% bracket, or short term capital gains tax, which means you’ve held it for a year or less, that’s typically ordinary income, which is 24% tax bracket plus whatever, in your state. So that’s the big disadvantage that you’re taxed multiple times on that investment, but it allows you flexibility to do what you need, move money in and out. The investment selection is yours and there’s typically less fees, because you don’t have that big administrator typically hanging over it like you do in a 401k or even an IRA.

We often see these, Tim with employee stock purchase programs, so if you’re in an ESPP with your employee, employer, they’ll put those dollars in a taxable account, typically RSUs are granted and they’ll put those dollars or shares and investment accounts, ISOs, that type of thing, as well. There are specific scenarios where you’ll use this, but the brokerage account, again, is often one that we don’t talk about enough for retirement purposes. Sometimes I don’t like to use it especially the further away you are for retirement, because you could say, “Hey, Tim, this is for retirement.” But it’s like, just kidding. Five years later we’re going to use it for something else. 

Now that $50,000 that I accounted for in your nest egg calculation is gone, right? That can be problematic. That 10% penalty, although it stinks, it can be a good firewall for you not to take that money out, but this is another important account to utilize as we’re growing our assets to then disperse in retirement, and we want to make sure that we pick efficiently from a tax perspective from each of these buckets year over year.

[00:28:00] TU: Tim, when you teach this topic, and I think you teach it so effectively, you mentioned earlier that not all buckets are created equal, right? If you have a million dollars in a Roth, a million dollars in a traditional, a million dollars in an HAS, a million in a 401K, a million in a brokerage account, you don’t really have $5 million. I mean, I guess you do on paper, but there’s going to be tax implications that are different. The visual you give for the brokerage is it’s got holes in the bucket, right, because we’re putting money in after tax, and then we’re going to incur either short or long term capital gains doesn’t mean it doesn’t have value, you gave several examples where it could in terms of bridging to delay Social Security, it could be a short or mid-term type of purchase five, 10 years if you want to get some growth momentum for the market, don’t want that sitting in our checking account. So there’s value there, but we also want to make sure we’re looking at the right priority of how we’re investing. 

I think one of the common mistakes that we are seeing, I think in part, just because of the availability in marketing around brokerage accounts is, are we putting money in a brokerage account and perhaps not taking advantage of some of the tax favored accounts we talked about. Is that intentionally the choice we’re making or are we not considering the tax implications by doing that? 

[00:29:09] TB: Yeah. That’s one thing we talked about, it’s a prioritization. We see pharmacists that come in, they have 1000s of dollars in a brokerage account, but they’re not really taking full advantage of match or, and I get it, Tim. I’m not a hater. I get it, because a lot of times we’re marketed to by said company that says “Hey, buy this and invest and you’ll get free bitcoin or ETFs or stock.” I understand the want to scratch the itch and get in and try to make money and invest, but if you think about it, and again, it’s not a bad thing, because you can offset losses, but if I’m being taxed already on if I’m in a 24% tax bracket for that money goes in, and then I’m taxed another 10 or 15% when it from capital gains, but then you can defer that tax or in a pre-tax account or pay it after it comes out. I think that there’s a lot of meat on the bone with regard to efficiency, right? That’s one of the things we preach is just being efficient. 

[00:30:14] TU: Yeah.

[00:30:14] TB: All of these have a place, particularly when talking about the in this retirement series, and there should be attention paid in a strategy and an allocation for each, just asking these questions if you’re listening to this, look at your balance sheet. Always comes back to the balance sheet and the goals. Look at the balance sheet, how much do you have in an after tax? How much do you have in taxable? How much you haven’t pre-tax? And take stock of where you’re at. 

Once you know where you’re at, then you can outline where you want to go. Yeah, I think, it’s really important to look at the priority. Again, I don’t hate on anyone in that, who is doing that. It’s just a matter of focusing and say, “Okay, what is important, what’s not important? Sometimes if we want to do some stock picking and things like that in a brokerage account, let’s just keep it minimum 5% of the overall portfolio, and then we can go from there. I’m a big believer in keep it simple and keep fees low and set the right asset allocation, and then go from there.

[00:31:11] TU: While we’re talking about priority, we’re not going to dig in depth on this episode, because we’ve done it on many others, ruling to 165 is one example, but we can’t omit the HSA when we’re talking about priority of investing. Back to my visual of your brokerage account with the holes in it, the HSA is the bulletproof account, right? Depending on how we’re using that account, we have an opportunity to avoid taxes throughout. Obviously, if we have healthcare expenses that we need to fund, we can, of course, use it for that and have some tax advantages. 

Got to be working for an employer, we have a high deductible health plan that dollars aren’t as big in terms of contributions that we’re going to see in a 401K or 403B, so 3650 for an individual 7300 for family in 2022. Some catch up provisions are again, but another tax optimization strategy that want to be considering. I hope we’re hitting that point home, intentionally is that I think one of the things our planning team does so well and a shout out to the integration between the planning and the tax team is, are those two things in sync? Are we are we planning with a tax mindset? Are we also thinking about the tax implications, but also building the financial plan around that as well? 

Tim, I probably should have mentioned this earlier, but we’ve thrown around a ton of numbers in terms of contribution amounts, we’ve talked about phase outs and AGI limits, and maybe some folks are trying to scratch those down. Hopefully they weren’t doing that when they’re driving, but we have all these numbers available for use, you don’t need to memorize any of those. We’ve got a sheet that has 2022 important numbers, even beyond just what we’re talking about here and investing savings, you can go to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/2022numbers, again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/2022numbers and get that information. 

Again, this is our second part in a four part series on retirement planning. Next week, we’re going to come back to risk tolerance versus risk capacity, a very important distinction between those and how we begin to determine within these accounts we talked about in this episode, where we actually start to invest the money. Then finally, we’ll wrap up in our fourth part about how to build the retirement paycheck. The team at YFP Planning is ready, whether you’re new practitioner, mid-career pharmacist, someone who is approaching retirement, our fee only financial planning team of five certified financial planners and an in-house tax team, including a CPA and an IRS Enrolled Agent, ready to work with you to help build your retirement plan among your other financial goals as well. 

If you want to learn more about the one-on-one fee only comprehensive financial planning services that are offered by YFP Planning, you can visit yfpplanning.com to book a free discovery call. Thanks for listening. We’ll see you next week as we continue the series on retirement planning. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:33:50] TU: Before we wrap up today’s show, let’s hear an important message from our sponsor Insuring Income. If you are in the market to add own occupation, disability insurance, term life insurance, or both, Insuring Income would love to be a resource. Insuring Income has relationships with all of the high quality disability insurance and life insurance carriers you should be considering and can help you design coverage to best protect you and your family. 

Head over to insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist or click on the link in the show notes to request quotes, ask a question or start down your own path of learning more about this necessary protection. 

[OUTRO]

[00:34:27] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on the show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment.

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the date publish. Such information may contain forward-looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacists podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 272: How Much Is Enough? (Retirement Planning)


How Much Is Enough? (Retirement Planning)

On today’s episode, sponsored by APhA, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, to discuss how much you need for retirement in part one of the four-part series focused on retirement planning.

Episode Summary

Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, to discuss how much is enough when it comes to retirement planning in part one of the four-part series focused on retirement planning. In this discussion, Tim and Tim cover finding a balance between saving for the future and living a rich life along the way, factors to consider including determining how much is needed when building a nest egg, what the 4% rule is and why it is commonly used as a safe withdrawal rate during retirement, and why time in the market and savings rate matter more than the rate of return on investments. Tim Baker shares his opinion on financial planning as an exercise in goal setting for the long term while balancing experiencing life in the present and how financial planning and even minor changes in your investment portfolio can have a significant impact on your total retirement amount. They dive into what many folks consider a safe savings rate and considerations for increasing that savings rate dependent on numerous factors in the financial plan. Tim and Tim explain the rule of 25, which is popularly used in the FIRE (Financial Independence Retire Early) community as a guideline for retirement savings, how it works, and how it compares to the 4% rule. They close with general calculations and formulas for determining the nest egg for retirement and tease next week’s episode on the “alphabet soup” of retirement accounts.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to The YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom.

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I kick off a four-part retirement planning series by discussing how to determine how much is enough when it comes to saving for retirement. Highlights from the show include finding a balance of saving for the future, while also living a rich life along the way, as Tim Baker says, “It can’t be just about the ones and zeros in the bank account.” Factors to consider when building a nest egg and determining how much is needed. What the 4% rule is and why it is commonly used as a safe withdrawal rate during retirement. And why time in the market and savings rate matters more than rate of return. Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does, and working one on one with more than 270 households in 40 Plus states.

YFP Planning offers fee only, high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one on one with a certified financial planner, who may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning financial planning services are a good fit for, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission pharmacists achieve financial freedom.

Okay, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, and then jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker.

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:01:33] TU: Today’s episode Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast is brought to you by The American Pharmacists Association. APhA has partnered with Your Financial Pharmacist to deliver personalized financial education benefits for APHA members. Throughout the year, APhA will be hosting a number of exclusive webinars covering topics like student loan debt, payoff strategies, home buying, investing, insurance needs, and much more. Join APhA now to gain premier access to these educational resources and to receive discounts on YFP products and services. You can join APhA at a 25% discount by visiting pharmacist.com/join, and using the coupon code YFP. Again, that’s pharmacist.com/join, and using the coupon code, YFP. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:02:19] TU: Tim Baker, welcome back on the show.

[00:02:21] TB: Thanks, Tim. Yeah, good to be back.

[00:02:23] TU: It’s been a while. I mean, you’ve done some case studies with the planning team, which have been awesome. But we haven’t been back on the show together in some time, so I’m looking forward to this series that we’re going to be doing on retirement planning. We’ve got a four-part series plan, all about retirement planning, starting with determining how much is enough, what do we need as we look at preparing towards retirement, and ending with strategies and considerations for actually building that retirement paycheck. And a topic that’s often overlooked, we’ll talk about that in detail when we get to that fourth and final part.

I believe we’ve constructed this, Tim, in a way that whether it’s a new practitioner who’s just getting started wondering what’s this big scary number for off in the future, or someone who’s mid-career checking in to see if they’re on track, or pre-retiree thinking about, “Hey, this is coming up, and are there some tweaks that I need to make, or adjustments or perhaps confirmation that I’m on track.” I think this topic is relevant, regardless of where someone is at, at their career.

So, we’re going to get into the dollars and cents. We’re going to nerd out on the nest egg and some of the X’s and O’s. But first, I think it’s valuable that we consider what is the purpose, what’s the vision for what we’re trying to do before we start thinking about, is it 3 million? Is it 4 million? Is it 5 million? So, Tim, talk to us about number one, why is this so important before we actually determine how much is enough, and then how are we going to get there? And how do we practically begin to accomplish defining the vision that we have when we think about retirement, and what that life will look like?

[00:03:57] TB: Yeah, so comprehensive financial planning, to me, it really boils down to the idea of how do I best go about living a wealthy life today, say in my 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, and a wealthy life tomorrow. We typically think of tomorrow, more in terms of like the long-term horizon of in my, 60s, 70s, 80s, 90s through retirement. It can be really difficult for us, Tim, to kind of conceptualize time, or like, feel time. So, the further, when we kind of talked to clients, and we say like, what does success look like a year out, two years out, three years out, five years out, those conversations are a lot easier to have. But as that time horizon becomes more and more, we kind of lose sight of how to even like think in decades.

So, to me, that’s what comprehensive financial planning, is about is kind of coming up with solutions where you feel good about what you’re doing today and then what you’re planning for the long tomorrow. And I think what often happens is that individuals, kind of swing one way or the other. So, like in our household, I’m thinking about, “Oh, man, are we saving enough for retirement? Are we doing everything from the long term?” Whereas my wife is like, “Bro, we have two young kids, we need to make sure that we’re doing things with them while they’re young, and they’re still under our roof and all that kind of stuff.”

I actually think some people think that that’s like not a good thing, if you have two partners that are kind of diametrically opposed. I think it’s good, because I think it leads to balance and leads to address some of those conversations. So, if you’re all one way, then sometimes it’s really hard. If you’re like, save, save, save, it’s really hard for you to open up your hand and spend. But the other thing, sometimes people are afraid to talk about a planner is like, “I’m very spendthrifty. I’m not saving enough for the future, because I can’t see two feet in front of my face”, or just, “I grew up in an environment where we didn’t really save. We just kind of live for today and hope for the best.”

So, to me, this whole thing of like, how much is enough? It’s kind of an exercise in that and projecting out, okay, what is a reasonable number that we should be shooting for? And are we doing what we need to do to get there? I think the disconnect with this is, oftentimes, you’ll get a statement, Tim, or you’ll talk to a financial planner, and it’s like, “Oh, you need $4 million to retire.” It’s like, that’s such a big number and I look at what’s in my account, and I’m like, “Yeah, right.” It doesn’t even calculate or compute. So then, it’s almost like you give up, right?

But the problem is, is that the number for a lot of our listeners, it’s going to be multi millions that they’re not going to need to save more than likely. And we’ll get into things like, where does security play a role? And if that’ll be there, and all that kind of stuff? But to me, that’s really the exercise. Are we doing what we need to do today? And then are we doing what we need to do to ensure that we’re good to go for tomorrow. I think it’s about as simple as that, and I think when you talk about retirement planning, you’re looking at the full breadth of the timeline, and making sure that – because it just gets – the longer that you wait, I kind of look at it as, if you started in your 20s, you’re climbing like a steady grade. If you start in your 60s, its Mount Everest, because you literally can’t save enough to kind of overcome that, and the alternative is just a huge cut in your lifestyle, and what you’re going to be able to afford when you do turn off that W-2 or income that’s coming in every two weeks.

[00:07:47] TU: Yeah, and I think so many people, as you mentioned, feel defeated by and we’ll talk about the nest egg numbers and kind of how we get there. I think for many folks, maybe there’s confirmation of, “Hey, I am on track.” And for others, they’re like, they hit the stop button, because they’re like, “No way this is going to happen for me in the future.” Because of, it’s hard to really believe in trust the process and time value of money and compound interest and growth, and that’s a future thing. That’s a tomorrow thing. And as you mentioned, it’s hard to see and imagine our future selves, especially when we’ve got things right in front of us today. And so, this is where the balance comes in. We’re going to go through this exercise of how much is enough. But as we talked about over and over and over again on the show, like an investing retirement plan is another great example of that, we can’t look at any one of these in a silo because for many, if not everyone listening, this is not the only thing they’re worried about, right?

[00:08:39] TB: Yeah. And just to go back to that, like in terms of the numbers, basically, I was doing some research for the case study that we recently recorded with Kelly and Robert, and I was trying to construct, what was the reasonable purchase price for a home in Portland, Oregon. The average, I think, was something like $88,000, or something like that in the late ‘80s. So, think about that, like those numbers. And again, when I typically talk about investments, and I talk about the secret ninja, the termite that is inflation, I always say that, what is it, that $4 latte at Starbucks in 30 years is going to cost north of 10. Or my dad will say, “A nickel would buy the whole candy store.” Now, a nickel doesn’t buy anything. When he’s grown up, he’s growing up in the ‘40s and ‘50s.

So, yeah, and to your point like, it is one – the investment and the retirement piece is one of many, many things that you have to consider. Just the overall risk to your wealth and planning for a catastrophic event is huge. Things like taxes, which are so overlooked, and how to pay your fair share, but then mitigate how much your – there’s so many things that kind of go into this, and a lot of it, we will talk about today, it’s not even about the rate of return or anything like that. It’s just about putting money in bucket.

[00:10:00] TU: Time and money.

[00:10:01] TB: Yeah, and it’s more about the savings rate, then the rate of return. So, even those mechanics and like the behavioral finance, that kind of bleeds into everything, it’s just so imperative that we’re looking at this and examining it. And unfortunately, because either it’s a boring topic, or it’s a painful topic, or we have head trash related to it with our upbringing, or name a number of reasons why we don’t necessarily want to look at this or work on it, it just becomes harder and harder as we go.

To give you some numbers, Tim. So, if you look at a pharmacist with medium pay, and they’re saving about 15% of income with an average annual rate of 6%, which is about what the market returns. So, that’s a fairly aggressive portfolio. If you started at age 25, by the time that you reach age 60, you have a portfolio of $2.6 million. Now, if you’re at age 25, and you’re saving 15%, and you’re an aggressive, that’s pretty good. The fact of the matter is, is that you’re probably not doing – a lot of people are not saving 15%, right off the bat.

At 30, when you get to – so you have 30 years now of accumulation, it goes to 1.8 million. So, a pretty big drop. At 35, just five years later, so 35 to 60, 1.2. If you start to the ripe age of 40, turning 40 this year, Tim, to age 60, so just 20 years, now, you’re not even crossing that million dollars. You’re at 822,000. So, a lot of this is just the mechanics of it’s better than what it was in the past. In the past, if you had a 401(k), you actually had to like sign up. Now, a lot of them will auto enroll you, so you are getting out of the way. But what I would encourage people if they’re not thinking about this, is add that 1% or that 2% every year, so you can get to that 15% or 16%. 

During one of my recent courses, they were looking at what is the – everyone talks about the safe withdrawal rate. We’ll talk about that, the 4%. But what’s the safe savings rate? And the number that I remember is about 16%. So, if you are enrolled in your 401(k) and auto enrolled you at five, you are ways away. So, then the flip side of that is for you to make up, you’re going to have to be saving 20%, 25%, 30% later in your career to kind of make up for that. So, these are all things to kind of be mindful of as you’re navigating this minefield, so to speak.

[00:12:24] TU: Yeah. I think we’ve all had a parent, grandparent, friend, mentor, colleague. Somebody has told us, you got to start saving as early as you possibly can. And the numbers you just gave highlight that. If you start at 25, instead of 30, you’re adding about a million dollars. If you started 25 instead of 35, 1.5 extra, and that’s just simple math savings calculator, time value of money. And those numbers are hard to believe. But it becomes at a point where you see the exponential growth of those funds, but it feels like a grind for that first 10, 12 years, and you start to see the time value of money work, it’s magic. It really is 76ers style, trust the process long-term.

[00:13:03] TB: Trust the process, Jojo.

[00:13:04] TU: It’s hard, though, right? Because what did we talk about in this show? Homebuying with student loans, all these competing priorities. We got to have an emergency fund, we’ve got to be – we know folks are working hard to save for kid’s college while they’re also caring for elderly parents. We want to travel. I mean, all of these competing priorities, and pharmacists make a great income. But at the end of the day, there’s only so much to go around. And so, we’re not suggesting that this is an easy drop in the bucket, but something that we need to be intentional and consider with the rest of the plan.

[00:13:34] TB: I’ll say like, in our household, I’m always like, “Hey, can we increase your 401(k)?” “No.” It’s a battle in my household. And I’m like, “I do this for a living. Trust me.” But it’s that pool again. So, I’m like, “Okay. But if that’s taken away from what’s actually in our bank account, and then funding some of these other goals.” So, it’s a struggle. I mean, it’s a struggle in our household. And again, I probably am too diligent on the future, and not so much on the present, although I think some of the things that we’ve done in our financial plan is kind of said otherwise. But this is – it’s such a human thing, right? Because it’s that delayed gratification. But it is one of those things that if you can understand how to tweak it now, potentially early in your career, or even to say, even later in your career, knowing what to do for the final 5 to 10 years of your career can make all the difference.

The other side of that is, things like, what is your asset allocation when you’re in your 50s, if you’re trying to retire at 60? What do you what are you doing from a Social Security claiming strategy? Is there a way to lock an income through like an – there’s a ton of things that you can do to shore up your prospects, that just like what we see with student loans is kind of, sometimes you just follow the crowd. “Oh, my co-worker is doing this, so I’m doing that.” That never go goes away. “My brother in law is doing this, so I’m going to claim here.”

So, to me, it’s what I often say is like, you don’t have the same goals or the same balance sheet as whoever that is. But it’s hard to basically discern, “Hey, this is my situation. This is what I’m trying to do.” And wave through all of the stuff that’s out there to say, “Okay, this is the right – this is a clear path.” It’s just tough, and there’s so many variables that go into it.

[00:15:27] TU: Tim, one thing I want to share, and you’ve done a good job of opening my eyes to this, and we see this with clients over and over again, before we get into the numbers in the weeds is that we often talk about saving for retirement from a scarcity standpoint, as a, “Hey, I might not have enough, or are we going to fall short.” But we see many instances where you could argue like, is someone saving too much? And I think the value of this exercise, as you mentioned, is we have to find this balance between taking care of our future self and living a rich life today.

So, if we have a quick start in our retirement, we run the nest egg, and we see we’re not running a monthly deficit, perhaps there’s a surplus there, that begs the question of like, are we living the rich life today? So, just like an opportunity cost, of having too much in the emergency fund, there could be an opportunity cost of too much in a retirement account. Maybe a good problem to have, but it’s a problem, nonetheless. So, we’re going to talk about the balance of that, and I think that side gets overlooked often when we talk about retirement planning.

[00:16:24] TB: Yeah, I mean, we’ve definitely had clients that come in, where we actually do the analysis and it’s like, “You’re going to be fine.” So, we can afford to dial this back. And it’s not just retirement accounts, it’s education, especially if we kind of reframe what is the goal around education? What is the goal around retirement? A lot of the times, Tim, especially if you’re on the younger end of things, we’re planning as if so security’s not going to be there. So, you’re shouldering this all yourself. But the fact is, is that there’s a stat that says today, about 50% of people have Social Security makes up 40% of their income, or it’s flipped, the other way around. So, that’s not going to zero. It might be 25, it might be 30, and we can talk about Social Security more in detail. But if you think about that, and we say, okay, for every $10 that you’re going to spend on Social Security, or every $10 in your paycheck, $4 of that is going to come from Social Security. And if you claim right, that number gets bigger and bigger. If you kind of go through a proper claiming strategy, that’s huge.

So, we kind of plan as if like the worst-case scenario, that’s not going to be there. But if we can kind of back some of those numbers. If we use today’s averages, or maybe even like, on the low end, it really lends itself to saying, “Hey, this is not so bad. Again, if you have a lot of time.” Now, if you’re up against it, there’s a lot less wiggle room. It’s almost like you’re trying to steer the Titanic away from the iceberg. The closer that you are, the harder it is just to get around it. If you have miles, like a lot of younger pharmacists do, a few tweaks here and there just makes all the difference. And that could just be from again, the contribution rate, the allocation, or even just doing it and saying like, where am I tracking to like where we’re currently contributing, and then maybe back that off to then enjoy more today. Which I think is something that’s very unusual, because I feel like most financial planners will say, as much as you can, save. Because the more money you have, the more options you have.

But my view is, you can do that, and I kind of look at it as you can stick your head and run through the rose bushes to get your soccer ball. But you’re not really enjoying yourself on the way through. So, I think that’s where that balance comes through. I remember having conversations with clients about this very early when we were going through this of like, we back this off, we buy the home sooner, maybe we start our family sooner because of what this analysis shows us.

[00:19:03] TU: Start the business.

[00:19:05] TB: Yeah, exactly. Exactly, right. And to me, that is power. That’s options, right? So, that’s why I’m just a big believer in a plan and planning. It’s a dynamic thing.

[00:19:15] TU: Yeah. And I bring that up, because again, I think we don’t talk about much of that side of it, and it is more from that scarcity mindset. But I just heard from a client yesterday, it said, one of the greatest values I’ve gotten from the planning team is the permission to spend in an area that they have determined as richest in their own lives. And that was around hosting and welcoming people into their home. And obviously, there’s costs that come with hosting. But at the end of the day, if you’ve got 3.2 versus 4.1, but you’re going to look back on all those memories of friends and people in your home. What are you going to remember, right? I mean, it’s an obvious – so yeah, we got to take care of the future self, but also are we making sure that we’re living a rich life today.

Let’s talk dollars and cents. How much is needed? How much is enough? And there’s different ways of doing this. I want to start him kind of back of napkin math. Disclaimer here is that, this is certainly not the advice of, “Hey, I run some numbers. I punch some things in a calculator, and I know exactly what I need for retirement.” So, we’re going to plant some seeds. But there’s obviously a lot of in-depth analysis that goes into this. But I want to start with the rule of 25, which is a common quick math that’s used in the Financial Independence Retire Early Community, the FIRE Community, which says take 25 times your annual expenses, and that’s roughly the estimated amount that you’ll need to achieve financial independence.

So, let’s say someone’s listening and they look at okay, if I had about $100,000 per year of annual expenses, 25 times 100,000, I need about $2.5 million to get to the point of financial independence. And what that is really referring to, is the amount that you would need to have invested in a conventional stock and bond portfolio. We’ll talk a little bit more about that throughout this series, to probably, keyword “probably”, consider yourself financially independent, that you could not depend upon work income and be able to draw from that portfolio without concern that you’re going to be running out of money sooner than would be desired. And that comes from, Tim, and I want you to break this down a little bit further. That rule of 25, the inverse of that comes from the 4% rule, which as you mentioned just a few moments ago is about this concept of safe withdrawal rate.

So, break that down a little bit more for us. We’ll talk about this in depth when we get to the retirement paycheck piece. But what is the 4% rule? And I know this has been debated, but why might this be a good starting point for us to think about what’s needed in a portfolio?

[00:21:38] TB: Yeah, so the safe withdrawal rate is based on the work by William Bengen. And what he did was he looked at all of the historical rates of return for a portfolio and I think he did like a 60/40, portfolio 60% in equities, 40% in bonds, and he used a time horizon of 30 years. Basically, what he was trying to figure out is, what is the amount of money that can draw from the worst 30-year period where at the end of that 30-year period, there would still be money left over? So, the money would not run out.

He did the analysis and basically came out with – and I forget what the year. I think it was like 1961 to 1991? Or maybe it was like –

[00:22:31] TU: Yeah, it sounds right.

[00:22:32] TB: Yeah, right around, I think it was like ‘60s and ;90s and 4% — so what that presumes is that all of the other roll on your peers, you could actually take out more, and still be okay. But the worst period in, I think, he did it since like the 1920s all the way up until I think 2012. The worst period of that 30-year period was from the ‘60s to the ‘90s, and the safe withdrawal rate where their money was not going to run out was 4%. Now, there’s been a ton of debate of whether that is. It disregards things like taxes, it disregards things like fees associated, so whether you’re working with other fees, it disregards, kind of adjusting portfolio as you go through those 30 years.

And then the other thing is that, one of the observations of late is that for a lot of retirees in this low interest rate environment, obviously, it’s ticked up here this year, and equities performing what they’re performing, maybe 4% is not necessarily a good role going forward. So, there’s a lot of debate about that, and can you set it for 4% and be good to go? Maybe. But that’s basically what it’s based on. It’s like, okay, what is the worst, and when they’ve tested it in other, say, like, Italy, it failed, where this basically was successful 100% of the time, in that same period, it failed 80% of the time in Italy. Not to say that we would have, but they were dealing with a lot of inflation and things like that.

So, that’s basically it. So, the inverse to your point is 25 times your annual expenses. The problem with the annual expenses, Tim, is that if you ask somebody like what’s your annual expenses, unless they’re a FIRE nerd, they’re not going to know. And even that, when you’re trying to back into building a retirement paycheck, I know some financial planners, they don’t even ask the client for their annual expenses. They just assume that everything on their W-2 is basically they’re going to spend.

[00:24:29] TU: Their income, yeah.

[00:24:29] TB: And there’s other ways that you can discount and things like that. But that’s kind of where you get to it. I wouldn’t say that rule, I like rules of thumbs because they’re easy to remember, right? We talk about rules of thumb and other parts of the financial plan. So, if it’s $100,000, 2.5 million, I don’t think that that’s necessarily something that is not a bad thing to at least have in your back of your mind to shoot for. But there’s a lot of gray and again, a lot of gray with the accumulation but then also the kind of withdrawal phase of like, “Okay, I have this pot of money where there’s 2.5 or 4 million. How do I actually turn that into a paycheck that’s going to sustain me for the rest of my life?” And that’s a difficult kind of thing to tackle.

[00:25:09] TU: Yeah, and we’re going to cover that in more depth in the retirement paycheck part of the series. And obviously, we’ll dig into that after that as well. But just to bring my example back here. So, 2.5 was the number that we determined. Again, 4%, inverse of the rule 25. So, 2.5, 4% of 2.5 would be $100,000. So, that would be the idea, and correct me if I’m wrong, Tim. But I think the 4% rule also suggests that you’re essentially bumping that up 3% per year for inflation. So, the 100 would become 103, and then you would continue that on into the future. 

So, there are a lot of nuances in there. You mentioned tax is one. Obviously, what types of accounts do you have saved up. We’re in a time period like we’re in right now, where inflation is obviously a lot higher than 3%. That can have an impact. So, if folks want to just back up napkin, okay, maybe three, three and a half, well, three would be 33 times annual expenses, you can run some of these numbers and kind of see what they would shake out to be.

Tim, let’s get a layer deeper then, which is the nest egg calculation, something that our planning team and works with our clients a lot on, which is we’re trying to get more specific about the individual circumstances for that client, what they currently have, say, projected age of retirement, how long they might live, how does Social Security factor in. And then ultimately, I think one of the great outcomes of a nest egg calculation is getting out of this monopoly money state of mind of 3, 4, $5 million into the future that I can’t relate to, to what I actually need next month, and the month after, and making this tangible as a part of the monthly planning.

So, tell us a little bit, high level, about the nest egg calculation and what are some of the factors we’re considering to ultimately get to that? Are we on track? Or are we not on track for what it’s enough?

[00:26:58] TB: Yeah, so I feel like very early in my financial planning career, I looked at the different approaches to this particular question of like, do we have enough? There are other things like Monte Carlo analysis, which we can talk about, or bootstrapping, which we can talk about briefly after this. But I found that doing the nest egg calculation was really important. But when I did it in my last firm, we would basically stop at, “Hey, you need 3 million, Tim.” And then we would move on to, “This is what you need to do for insurance or your state plan or whatever.” It was, like you said, it was like monopoly money. Nothing about that connect it to the client, especially if the further away they were. I went out to reference that. If it’s like you have a million dollars and need 1.5, and you’re four or five or six years away, then that obviously connects.

So, what I basically did was, I was like, okay, I asked the question, how can we make this more digestible? I’ll walk through kind of high level of the nest egg, and then I kind of see how we pivot from there. What we do is we take a client, we take their current age, we take what their target retirement age, which for a lot of people, it’s like, I don’t know, 65, or maybe it’s full retirement age for a lot of – 67. And that gives us the work life expectancy. That’s basically the amount of time left that you have to work for the man. That’s your timeline, your career timeline. 

And then we look at what their life expectancy is, which you can go on to socialsecurity.gov, right now, put in your birth date, your gender, and it’ll spit out the year and the month you’re going to die. So, for me, it’s like 86.8 years old. Now, what most financial planners will do is they’ll go a little bit beyond that. So, 90 to 100. A lot of like financial planning software will go to age 100. You just kind of pick what is a good timeline for you. If you take the number that you’re going to retire at 67, for an example, and then say, we’re going to die at 95, then you have 28 years of basically, retirement, senior unemployment. And that’s what makes us really hard, Tim, is that we’re trying to solve an equation without all the variables, right? We don’t know when we’re going to pass away. So, we just make some assumptions. And then we look at what do we currently have in retirement savings, so that’s all the 401(k)’s, IRA’s, all the alphabet soup that we’ll talk about in the series.

And then what is your current income? Now, we use current income because we use a discounted amount called your wage replacement ratio, to kind of figure out what the need is in retirement. So, a lot of planners will use 60% to 80%. You just kind of figure out what that is. The logic behind that is that, as you are leading up to retirement, a big part of your paycheck, 20%, 30% is going to be just saving for retirement, and then when you retire, you’re not going to be doing that anymore. Then you have to make assumptions about what your portfolio looks like, so that’s where we kind of go into like a 6%. That’s a pretty aggressive portfolio. And then what that would look like in terms of draw down, and that gets your total needs.

So, as an example, if we look at a pharmacist that makes $120,000, and has $40,000, in the retirement accounts. They’re age 30. They’re going to basically work to 67. That’s 37 years. So, we start with at $120,000, and say, the wage replacement is 70%. That means that we need to plan for, 84,000. So, that’s 70% of 120. Now, if we zero out Social Security, that means that we’re planning the whole need ourselves, that’s 84,000. Now, in 37 years, Tim, when I’m 67, that’s going to be equivalent to about a quarter million dollars. What that means is that every year from 67 to 95, when I die, I need a quarter million dollars to live, which that’s where that kind of gets wonky, because you’re saying, okay, 84,000 is the same as 250,000 in 37 years. And the answer is yes.

[00:30:59] TU: Yeah. Tim, that’s the piece, like, as we’ve talked to so many groups on this. And obviously, for those listening that are near retirement, again, the disconnect is not there, because you’re close to that dollar, and you understand what the inflation that’s happened over time. But when we’re speaking with a group that’s earlier in their career, this is where they see the 3, 4 or 5 million and they’re like, “You all are crazy. The numbers don’t add up. How much money you need?” It’s because we’re thinking about in terms of today’s dollars versus future dollars.

[00:31:27] TB: Right. Correct. So, if we look at that, and you’re like, “Okay, quarter million dollars”, what do I need in the portfolio to sustain a quarter million dollars, essentially, for 28 years between ‘67 and ‘95? And the answer is about 4.4 million. Now, we know that social security is going to be there. So, even if we use something like nominal, and we say that the annual Social Security benefit is going to be something like 30,000, that drops it down to 2.8. So, it is a huge thing, but again, we zero that out. So then, we say, okay, let’s go at 4.4. And you say, okay, Social Security is going to be there. But let’s plan this, we’re going to do it all by ourselves.

That means that for us to get to 4.4, if we assume that we have $40,000 saved already, it’s basically a thousand bucks that we need to invest monthly with that current $40,000. So, to me, this is like the special sauce where I’m like, “Okay, 4.4 doesn’t really mean anything to me. So, how do I make it mean something?” We basically discount it back to like, how will it mean for me today? So, if we basically make a payment, this is a time value money calculation of $40,000, and we assume certain return everything, it’s $1,000. So, then what we do is we say, “Okay, client, how much are you putting into your 401(k), 5%? Okay, so 5% of 120? What’s your max, 3%? Okay, 3% of 120. That’s actually $800. So, 1,000 minus 800, the deficit is about 200 bucks. That’s basically on a monthly basis, where we have about $200 per month drag to get to that 4.4 million.

[00:33:07] TU: But 4.4 just became tangible, all of a sudden, right?

[00:33:10] TB: Right. That doesn’t necessarily account for everything like, fees, and taxes and all that kind of stuff. We’re just going to drag. But the idea is that, then we can say, okay, well, what happens if we max out the IRA? Or what happens if this isn’t an 80/20 portfolio, which is more conservative than like the example that we gave? What happens if we take a little bit more risk? What happens if we do this or that?  That, to me, is where you could say, “Wow, we’re actually a lot further along than we thought. We have more options here.”

So, to me, the nest egg calculation, it’s a time value money calculator, that usually gives you this big pot of money that you need. But I think, the special sauce is to kind of discount it back for it, actually means something to me today. And that’s where, I think, great planning can kind of come from there.

[00:33:58] TU: Yeah, and I think one of the things we hear a lot from prospective clients. I know Justin does when he’s talking with folks, and we certainly see the value of this coming to clarity in the planning process, is this is one of those topics for good reason that there’s a lot of anxiety and uneasiness, because it’s a, as we’ve talked about, big number. It’s out in the future. We get into the what if scenarios. What if I don’t have enough? What about this? Am I going to be able to care for my family? Do the things I want to do? And we underestimate, in my opinion, we underestimate the mental toll that that running conversation has in our head. Do I have enough? Will I have enough? What about this? Could we be doing more? And whether we like the numbers, whether we punch this number and we see a thousand, we’re like, “Tim, I’m never working with you again. Don’t show me this number again.” But we have a picture of what’s it going to take each month. And just like we talked about budget and other things, what do we need to do? What do we need to change? Or perhaps nothing to make this goal a reality. So, we’re bringing the unknown, big scary parts of the plan into reality, and something that we can address on a month by month basis, and begin to work a plan if we don’t have it yet in place, that allows us to hopefully make this goal a reality.

[00:35:09] TB: Yeah, it’s so true. And I think that’s why it can be such a cliff to get over, is because when you’re going through this process, you’re setting things up. But idea is that, once you get past the initial setup, life is going to change, and you’re always going to have challenges. But if you know, it’s kind of like what we were talking about, I think before we turned the mic on. If you know in the background, that you’re funding these goals, whether they’re near term or long term, it’s like, that can kind of create scarcity, because you are kind of being very deliberate with how you’re directed money. In the back of your mind, you still know that you’re doing the pay yourself first, or you’re putting those goals that are really important for you and your family at the forefront.

Whereas, if you just throw everything into a pot of money, you’re not clearly distinguishing what are we actually doing? So, to me, that’s super important. A lot of it is like for retirement is, in this case, jacking the employee contribution up 1% or 2%, fixes it, without doing anything else at all. The other thing you could do is just change the allocation to aggressive, and you’re 200 to the to the front side of it. You’re 200 to the good side of it. And that’s what we talk about when we speak about investment, and kind of aggressive Jane and conservative Jane, and kind of highlight in what little tweaks to your portfolio can do. It’s huge. And not doing that, is to your point, can cause that mental bandwidth and kind of caused you to not do anything at all, which is not necessarily good either.

[00:36:49] TU: Yeah, Tim, this is a great start to this series, and starting with a question of how much do I need? And even before that question of where am I going and why am I going in that direction? Right? So, we talked about living a rich life today, making sure we’re taking care of our future selves. And before we talk about, which we’re going to on the next episode, some of the actual X’s and O’s. What are the vehicles that we could use to be able to begin to build this portfolio? So, once we identify, we need three, we need four, we need four and a half, whatever that number is. The next natural question is, “Well, how do I get there? What do I do? What are the options that I have available?” So, we’re going to talk about that on the next episode, but this episode is really about laying the foundation around how much is enough? And what are some of the factors that I may use to begin to make that determination?

Of course, we’re biased, but the team at YFP Planning, whether you’re a new practitioner, whether you’re in the middle of your career, whether you’re nearing retirement, or maybe have already gotten to the point of retirement, our fee only financial planning team of five certified financial planners and our in-house tax team, including a CPA, and an IRS enrolled agent, they’re ready to work with you to build a retirement plan among other financial goals that you’re working on as well.

So, if you’re interested in learning more about our one on one comprehensive financial planning services, you can book a free discovery call. To learn more about that service, determine whether that’s a good fit, and you can do that by scheduling an appointment at yfpplanning.com. Again, that’s yfpplanning.com.

Tim, this wraps up our first four episodes, and we appreciate everyone listening and we’re going to pick back up next week, talking about some of the alphabet soup of retirement accounts. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:38:28] TU: Before we wrap up today’s episode of Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, I want to again thank our sponsor, the American Pharmacists Association. APhA is every pharmacists’ ally advocating on your behalf for better working conditions, fair PBM practices and more opportunities for pharmacists to provide care. Make sure to join A Bolder APhA to gain premier access to financial educational resources, and to receive discounts on YFP products and services.

You can join APhA at a 25% discount by visiting pharmacist.com/join and using the coupon code YFP. Again, that’s pharmacist.com/join, using the coupon code YFP.

[OUTRO]

[00:39:08] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]